JP2020182706A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine that can prevent a performance from being inappropriate.SOLUTION: A performance control CPU 120, as a variable display performance, can execute a setting suggestion on the basis of any one of patterns PT-1 to PT-7 or a ready-to-win notice on the basis of a pattern PT-8 or PT-9, determines execution of the ready-to-win notice (high) on the basis of the pattern PT-9 in preference to the setting suggestion in 103SGS294, when the pattern PT-9 is won in the lottery of the ready-to-win notice in a variable display performance determination process, and determines execution of the ready-to-win notice (low) on the basis of the pattern PT-8 in preference to the setting suggestion (low) on the basis of any one of patterns PT-1 to PT-4 in 103SGS301 when the setting suggestion (high) on the basis of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 is not won, even when the lottery of the setting suggestion is executed in the 103SGS296.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 8-15

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine capable of firing a game medium into a game area and controlling the game to an advantageous state advantageous to the player by playing a game.

Some conventional gaming machines can change the probability that the variable display result will be a big hit (probability of being controlled to an advantageous state) by changing the set value (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-200902

In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a set value depending on the type of animal displayed, but for example, a notice effect that suggests that a jackpot state, which is an advantageous state, is obtained. When any of the above setting suggestion effects can be executed, no consideration is given to which effect is prioritized, and the setting suggestion effect to be set as a set value when controlled in an advantageous state is executed. There was a problem that the production became inappropriate.

The present invention has been made by paying attention to such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of preventing improper production.

The game machine of means 1
By launching a game medium (for example, a game ball) into a game area (for example, left game area 151SG002L or right game area 151SG002R) and playing a game, it is possible to control an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player. It is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 6) having different advantages for the player.
A predetermined effect executing means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can perform a predetermined effect according to any one of a plurality of types of effect modes) as an effect during variable display, in any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7. It has a setting suggestion based on it, or a part that can execute reach notice based on patterns PT-8 and PT-9).
The effect mode of the predetermined effect is a special mode (for example, a reach notice based on the special pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9) that suggests that the predetermined effect is controlled, and a suggestion regarding the setting. Includes specific embodiments (eg, setting suggestions based on any of the specific patterns PT-1 to PT-7).
The special aspect is a first special aspect (for example, reach notice (low)) and a second special aspect (for example, reach notice) that suggests that the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than that of the first special aspect. (High)), including
The specific aspect is a first specific aspect (for example, setting suggestion (low)) and a second specific aspect (for example, setting suggestion (high)) that suggests setting of a setting value having a higher advantage than the first specific aspect. )) Including
The predetermined effect executing means is
When both the predetermined effect of the second special aspect and the predetermined effect of the specific aspect can be executed, the predetermined effect of the second special aspect is executed with priority over the predetermined effect of the specific aspect (for example). When the effect control CPU 120 wins the pattern PT-9 in the reach advance notice lottery in the variable display effect determination process shown in FIG. 8-15 of the first embodiment, the reach advance notice based on the pattern PT-9 in the 103SGS294 ( High) execution is determined in preference to setting suggestions based on any of patterns PT-1 to pattern PT-7),
When both the predetermined effect of the first special aspect and the predetermined effect of the specific aspect can be executed, the predetermined effect of the specific aspect can be executed with priority over the predetermined effect of the first special aspect. (For example, when the effect control CPU 120 wins any of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 in the setting suggestion lottery in the variable display effect determination process shown in FIG. 8-15 of the first embodiment, the 103SGS298. The part that prioritizes the execution of the setting suggestion (high) based on any of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 over the reach notice (low) based on pattern PT-8),
further,
A variable winning means (for example, a special variable winning means having a large winning opening) that can be changed into a first state (for example, an open state) and a second state (for example, a closed state) in which the game medium is more difficult to win than the first state. A winning means (for example, a first starting winning opening A, a first starting winning opening B, a second starting winning opening, a general winning entry) including at least a ball device 151SG701) and the game medium is given according to the winning of the game medium. Mouth 151SG010, Fuden winning opening, Large winning opening),
A first gaming state (for example, a low base state) and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state (for example, a high base state including a first high base state and a second high base state). A game state control means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process) that can be controlled by
In the first gaming state, a second number (for example, for example), which is the number of game media given to the first number (for example, the value of the out number counter), which is the number of game media fired into the game area. A calculation means capable of calculating the ratio (value of the prize ball counter) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process of 151SGS292 of the base value calculation process shown in FIGS. 9-27).
A display means (for example, display monitor 151SG029) for displaying information (for example, a base value) regarding the ratio calculated by the calculation means, and
With
When the variable winning means is controlled to a predetermined state (for example, a small hit game state) which is a state different from the advantageous state, the variable winning means is controlled to the first state (for example, a large winning opening during a small hit game). The part where is released),
When the game medium wins a prize in the variable winning means that has changed to the first state based on being controlled to the predetermined state in the first gaming state, the calculation means of the game medium given by the winning. Add the number to the second number (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-28 (A), when the variable display result is a small hit in the variable display of the first special symbol in the low base state, the variable display The part that adds the number of prize balls given during the small hit game based on the number of prize balls to the prize ball counter)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the enjoyment of the predetermined effect from being lowered by excessively restricting the execution of the predetermined effect of the specific mode. In addition, it is possible to display information regarding the ratio in consideration of the number of game media given by winning the variable winning means that has changed to the first state in the first gaming state.

The game machine of means 2
It can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and is set to one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 6) having different advantages for the player. A possible gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1)
A predetermined effect executing means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can perform a predetermined effect according to any one of a plurality of types of effect modes) as an effect during variable display, in any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7. It has a setting suggestion based on it, or a part that can execute reach notice based on patterns PT-8 and PT-9).
The effect mode of the predetermined effect is a special mode (for example, a reach notice based on the special pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9) that suggests that the predetermined effect is controlled, and a suggestion regarding the setting. Includes specific aspects (eg, setting suggestions based on any of the specific patterns PT-1 to PT-7).
When both the predetermined effect of the special aspect and the predetermined effect of the specific aspect can be executed by the predetermined effect executing means (for example, the timing at which a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the variable display of the symbol (variable display mode). (Timing before reaching)), the predetermined effect of the special aspect can be executed in preference to the predetermined effect of the specific aspect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 may be used in FIG. 8- of the first embodiment). In the variable display effect determination process shown in 15, when the pattern PT-9 is won in the reach notice lottery, the execution of the reach notice (high) based on the pattern PT-9 is determined in 103SGS294 with priority over the setting suggestion. Even if the lottery of the setting suggestion is executed in the part or 103SGS296, if the setting suggestion (high) based on the pattern PT-5 to PT-7 is not won, the reach notice (low) based on the pattern PT-8 in 103SGS301 is not won. ) Is determined with priority over the setting suggestion (low) based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4. / The effect control CPU 120 determines the reach notice (high)> the setting suggestion (high). > Reach notice (low)> Setting suggestion (low) A part that determines the execution of an effect based on any of patterns PT1 to PT-9 at a ratio (see Fig. 8-20 of variant 1))
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, when the control is performed in an advantageous state, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect of a specific mode from being executed and the effect from becoming inappropriate.

The gaming machine of means 3 is the gaming machine according to means 1 or 2.
The predetermined effect executing means is
When both the predetermined effect of the second specific aspect and the predetermined effect of the special aspect can be executed, the predetermined effect of the second specific aspect is executed with priority over the predetermined effect of the special aspect (for example). When any one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 is won in the setting suggestion lottery in the variable display effect determination process shown in FIG. 8-15 of the first embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 wins the pattern PT in the 103SGS298. The part in which the execution of the setting suggestion (high) based on any of -5 to PT-7 is prioritized over the reach notice (low) based on the pattern PT-8),
When both the predetermined effect of the first specific aspect and the predetermined effect of the special aspect can be executed, the predetermined effect of the special aspect can be executed with priority over the predetermined effect of the first specific aspect. (For example, when the effect control CPU 120 wins the pattern PT-8 in the reach notice lottery in the variable display effect determination process shown in FIG. 8-15 of the first embodiment, the pattern PT-8 is changed to the pattern PT-8 in the 103SGS301. The part that prioritizes the execution of the reach notice (low) based on the setting suggestion (low) based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-4)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the enjoyment of the predetermined effect from being lowered by excessively restricting the execution of the predetermined effect of the special aspect.

The gaming machine of means 4 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3.
An operation promotion notification means capable of executing an operation promotion notification that prompts the player to execute an operation (for example, the effect control CPU 120 performs an operation promotion effect that encourages the player to operate the push button 31B during the operation validity period of the push button 31B. Executable part) and
An operation detecting means (for example, a push sensor 35B) capable of detecting a specific operation (for example, an operation for operating the push button 31B) by the player regardless of whether or not the operation promotion notification by the operation prompting means is executed. When,
With
The predetermined effect executing means can execute a predetermined effect based on the detection of the specific operation by the motion detecting means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 presses the push button 31B during the operation valid period of the push button 31B. When a specific operation to be operated is detected by the push sensor 35B, the image Z1 is displayed in response to the operation of the push button 31B regardless of whether or not the operation promotion image prompting the player to operate the push button 31B is displayed. A part that can perform the effect of changing to image Z2 (destroying the paraglider and dropping it). Modification example)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, a player who knows a specific motion can execute a predetermined effect at a desired timing by performing the specific motion, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

The gaming machine of means 5 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 4.
The predetermined effect is a common effect period (for example, a reach notice or a setting suggestion) in which a common effect is executed regardless of whether the predetermined effect of the special aspect or the predetermined effect of the specific aspect is executed. Regardless of the presence or absence, the effect of the mode in which the image Z1 fades in from the left side of the display area of the image display device 5 and moves toward the right side of the display area is executed) and the predetermined aspect of the special aspect. A non-common production period (for example, whether it is a reach notice or a setting suggestion) that can specify which of the production and the predetermined production of the specific mode can be specified, that is, the number of images Z2 corresponding to the production pattern Is a non-common effect period in which the effect of moving downward from the display area of the image display device 5 is executed) (see FIG. 8-18).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, by having a common effect period, it is possible to effectively increase the player's expectation as to which of the predetermined effect of the special aspect and the predetermined effect of the specific aspect is executed. You can improve your interest.

The gaming machine of means 6 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 5.
The predetermined effect executing means can execute a predetermined effect of a special aspect which is a suggestion of being controlled to the advantageous state and also a suggestion regarding a setting (for example, both a reach notice and a setting suggestion can be executed). Occasionally, a specific image that suggests both a jackpot and the highest setting (setting value 6) (for example, an image in which a paraglider in which a character appears moves while displaying the image Z1 of the paraglider) is displayed. Part etc.)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to effectively increase the player's expectation that the predetermined effect of the special mode or the special mode different from the specific mode is executed, so that the game interest can be improved.

In addition, the embodiment for carrying out the invention described later includes the inventions relating to the gaming machines of the following means 7 to 13. Conventionally, in a game machine, the number of prize balls (the number of prize balls) relative to the number of game media (first number) used for the game in the normal state (first game state) as shown in JP-A-2018-792202. Some of them are equipped with a prize ratio indicator (display means) capable of calculating the base which is the ratio of the second number) and displaying the calculated base (information about the calculated ratio). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, the number of prize balls given by the game ball (game medium) winning a large prize opening (variable prize means) when the variable display result is a small hit in the normal state. There is a problem that it is unclear whether or not to include in the calculation of the base, and in view of this point, the number of game media given by winning a prize in the variable winning means when a predetermined condition is satisfied in the first game state is calculated. There is a need to provide a game machine that can display information about the considered ratio.

The gaming machine of means 7
A gaming machine (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) by launching a gaming medium (for example, a gaming ball) into a gaming area (for example, left gaming area 151SG002L or right gaming area 151SG002R) and playing a game. , Pachinko game machine 1)
A variable winning means (for example, a special variable winning means having a large winning opening) that can be changed into a first state (for example, an open state) and a second state (for example, a closed state) in which the game medium is more difficult to win than the first state. A winning means (for example, a first starting winning opening A, a first starting winning opening B, a second starting winning opening, a general winning entry) including at least a ball device 151SG701) and the game medium is given according to the winning of the game medium. Mouth 151SG010, Fuden winning opening, Large winning opening),
A first gaming state (for example, a low base state) and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state (for example, a high base state including a first high base state and a second high base state). A game state control means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process) that can be controlled by
In the first gaming state, a second number (for example, for example), which is the number of game media given to the first number (for example, the value of the out number counter), which is the number of game media fired into the game area. A calculation means capable of calculating the ratio (value of the prize ball counter) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process of 151SGS292 of the base value calculation process shown in FIGS. 9-27).
A display means (for example, display monitor 151SG029) for displaying information (for example, a base value) regarding the ratio calculated by the calculation means, and
With
When the variable winning means is controlled to a predetermined state (for example, a small hit game state) which is a state different from the advantageous state, the variable winning means is controlled to the first state (for example, a large winning opening during a small hit game). The part where is released),
When the game medium wins a prize in the variable winning means that has changed to the first state based on being controlled to the predetermined state in the first gaming state, the calculation means of the game medium given by the winning. Add the number to the second number (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-28 (A), when the variable display result is a small hit in the variable display of the first special symbol in the low base state, the variable display The part that adds the number of prize balls given during the small hit game based on the number of prize balls to the prize ball counter)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to display information regarding the ratio considering the number of game media given by winning the variable winning means changed to the first state in the first game state.

The gaming machine of the means 8 is the gaming machine according to the means 7.
The variable winning means has a specific area (for example, a second count switch 151SG023B) into which the game medium can enter.
The advantageous state can be controlled by entering the game medium into the specific area (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-25 and 9-26, the game ball moves to the second count switch 151SG023B during the small hit game. The part that is controlled to the jackpot game state based on being detected)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the player can pay attention to whether or not the game medium enters the specific area, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

The gaming machine of the means 9 is the gaming machine according to the means 7 or the means 8.
The variable winning means has a specific area (for example, a second count switch 151SG023B) into which the game medium can enter.
The advantageous state can be controlled by entering the game medium into the specific area (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-25 and 9-26, the game ball moves to the second count switch 151SG023B during the small hit game. The part that is controlled to the jackpot game state based on being detected),
When the game medium wins the variable winning means after the game medium enters the specific area, the calculation means does not add the number of the game media given based on the winning to the second number (for example,). As shown in FIG. 9-28 (A), after the game ball is detected by the second count switch 151SG023B during the small hit game, even if the game ball wins in the large winning opening, the prize corresponding to the winning. The part where the number of balls is not added to the prize ball counter)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, an inappropriate ratio is displayed in which the number of game media given based on the game medium that has won the variable winning means after the game medium has entered the specific area is added to the second number. Can be prevented.

The gaming machine of the means 10 is the gaming machine according to the means 7.
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a so-called small hit rush) in which the frequency of the first gaming state is increased by the end of the advantageous state. hand,
When the game medium wins the variable winning means that has changed to the first state based on the fact that the calculation means is controlled to the predetermined state in the special state, the calculation means of the game medium given based on the winning. The number is not added to the second number (for example, the prize ball given based on the game ball winning the big prize opening during the small hit rush is not added to the prize ball counter).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent an inappropriate ratio in which the number of game media given by winning the variable winning means is added to the second number in a special state is displayed.

The gaming machine of the means 11 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 7 to the means 10.
A first path (for example, left game area 151SG002L) in which the game medium is launched in the first game state, and a second path (for example, right game area 151SG002R) in which the game medium is launched when not in the first game state. ) With a game area with
The variable winning means is provided so that a game medium launched in the second path can win a prize (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-1 and 9-5, a winning unit 151SG700 including a special variable winning ball device 151SG701). Is located in the right game area 151SG002R)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to display information regarding the ratio considering the number of game media given by winning the variable winning means provided in the second path.

The gaming machine of the means 12 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 7 to the means 11.
A first variable display means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process) capable of executing variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol), and
A second variable display means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process) capable of executing variable display of the second identification information (for example, a second special symbol), and
With more
In the first gaming state, the variable display result of the second identification information in the second variable display means is controlled to the predetermined state by becoming a predetermined result (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-28 (C), the CPU 103. Is the part that controls the small hit game state by making the variable display result a small hit in the variable display of the second special symbol up to four times immediately after the game state shifts from the high base state to the low base state).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the number of game media given by winning the variable winning means in the first state when the variable display result of the second identification information becomes a predetermined result in the first game state is taken into consideration. Information about percentages can be displayed.

The gaming machine of the means 13 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 7 to the means 12.
A variable display means capable of executing variable display (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process) and
Hold storage means that can store information related to variable display as hold storage (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes start winning determination processing),
With more
The game state control means has a first condition (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-19 (B)), which is satisfied when the number of variable displays executed in the second game state is the first number. The variable display of the special symbol is executed 100 times, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed 10 times, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are executed 100 times in total. The second condition (for example, the number of times the variable display result is a small hit has reached 10 times), which is satisfied when the number of times the predetermined state is reached in the second game state becomes the second number of times. It is possible to control from the second gaming state to the first gaming state by satisfying any of the conditions (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-22 and 9-23). The part where the game state shifts from the high base state to the low base state based on the establishment of),
In the variable winning means, the variable display result based on the hold storage stored in the hold storage means during the second game state is shifted from the second game state when the first condition or the second condition is satisfied. When the predetermined result is obtained by being executed in the first gaming state and the predetermined state is controlled, the first state is controlled (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-28 (C)). , When the game state is controlled to the small hit game state by the variable display result becoming a small hit in a maximum of 4 variable displays immediately after the game state shifts from the high base state to the low base state, the big winning opening is opened. The part that becomes the state)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the variable display based on the hold memory stored in the second game state is executed in the first game state shifted from the second game state to obtain a predetermined result, so that the first state is changed. Information about the ratio considering the number of game media given by winning the winning means can be displayed.

In addition, the present invention may have only the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention, and has a configuration other than the invention-specific matters together with the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention. It may be a thing.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko game machine. It is a rear perspective view of a pachinko machine. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating production control commands. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is a figure which illustrates the fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of each big hit. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table (for jackpot A), and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table (for jackpot B and jackpot C), and (C) Is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern determination table for small hits. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern determination table for detachment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the received command buffer at the time of a moving prize. (A) is a front view of a display monitor, (B) is a view showing a display mode of the display monitor, and (C) is an explanatory view of display contents. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect determination processing during variable display. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the effect type during variable display. (A) is a diagram showing the effect (reach notice) type determination table A, and (B) is a diagram showing the effect (setting suggestion) type determination table B. (A) to (C) are diagrams showing the flow of the effect during variable display. (A) is a diagram showing an effect mode of reach notice (low) based on pattern PT-8, and (B) is a diagram showing an effect mode of reach notice (high) based on pattern PT-9. (A) is a flowchart showing an example of the effect determination process during variable display as a modification 1, and (B) is a diagram showing a determination ratio of reach notice and setting suggestion when the effect type determination table C is used. (A) is a diagram showing an effect period of the variable display effect as in the second embodiment, and (B) is a diagram showing an effect execution determination table during variable display. (A) is a diagram showing the execution decision ratio of reach notice and setting suggestion in the first period and the second period at the set value 1 and the set value 6 when the fluctuation pattern is normal reach, and (B) is set when the fluctuation pattern is super reach. It is a figure which shows the execution decision ratio of the reach notice and the setting suggestion in the 1st period and the 2nd period in the value 1 and the setting value 6. It is a figure which shows the effect type determination ratio during variable display in the 1st period when the fluctuation pattern is a normal reach. It is a figure which shows the effect type determination ratio during variable display in the 2nd period when the fluctuation pattern is a normal reach. It is a figure which shows the effect type determination ratio during variable display in the 1st period when the fluctuation pattern is super reach. It is a figure which shows the effect type determination ratio during variable display in the 2nd period when the fluctuation pattern is super reach. (A) is a diagram showing the execution decision ratio of the reach notice and the setting suggestion in the first period and the second period in the set value 1 and the set value 6 when the fluctuation pattern is the normal reach in the third embodiment, and (B) is the figure showing the execution decision ratio of the setting suggestion. It is a figure which shows the execution decision ratio of the reach notice and the setting suggestion in the 1st period and the 2nd period in the set value 1 and the set value 6 in super reach. It is a figure which shows the effect type determination ratio during variable display in the 1st period when the fluctuation pattern is a normal reach. It is a figure which shows the effect type determination ratio during variable display in the 2nd period when the fluctuation pattern is a normal reach. It is a figure which shows the effect type determination ratio during variable display in the 1st period when the fluctuation pattern is super reach. It is a figure which shows the effect type determination ratio during variable display in the 2nd period when the fluctuation pattern is super reach. It is a figure which shows the production period of the effect during variable display as Example 4. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect determination processing during variable display as Example 4. (A) is a diagram showing the execution decision ratio of the reach notice and the setting suggestion in the first period at the set value 1 and the set value 6 in the fluctuation pattern common to the normal reach and the super reach in the fourth embodiment, and (B) is the fluctuation pattern. The figure showing the execution decision ratio of the reach notice and the setting suggestion in the second period at the set value 1 and the set value 6 in the normal reach, (C) shows the fluctuation pattern in the second period in the set value 1 and the set value 6 in the super reach. It is a figure which shows the execution decision ratio of the reach notice and the setting suggestion of. It is a figure which shows the effect type determination ratio during variable display in the 1st period. It is a figure which shows the effect type determination ratio during variable display in the 2nd period when the fluctuation pattern is a normal reach. It is a figure which shows the effect type determination ratio during variable display in the 2nd period when the fluctuation pattern is super reach. It is a figure which shows the production period of the effect during variable display as a modification 2. (A) is a diagram showing the execution decision ratio of the reach notice and the setting suggestion in the first period at the set value 1 and the set value 6 which are common to all the variation patterns in the modified example 2, and (B) is a diagram showing the execution decision ratio of the variation pattern is normal reach / super reach. The figure showing the execution decision ratio of the reach notice and the setting suggestion in the second period in the set value 1 and the set value 6 in common, (C) shows the variation pattern common to the normal reach and the super reach, and the third in the set value 1 and the set value 6. It is a figure which shows the execution decision ratio of the reach notice and the setting suggestion in 3 periods. It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is an exploded perspective view of a game board and a prize ball unit. It is an exploded perspective view of a game board and a prize ball unit. It is a rear view of the game board. It is a front view which shows the structure of a prize ball unit. (A) is a diagram showing a distribution member in the first induction state, and (B) is a diagram showing a distribution member in the second induction state. (A) is a diagram showing an operation pattern of a distribution member and an operation pattern of a distribution member, and (B) is a diagram showing a determination ratio of an operation pattern of a slide member. 9 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 9-4. It is sectional drawing of BB in FIG. 9-4. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the approach target of a game ball and the detection state of each switch. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko game machine. It is a figure which shows the winning opening which can win in each game state, and the number of prize balls in each winning opening. It is a rear perspective view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of a display monitor. It is a figure which illustrates the production control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is a figure which illustrates the fluctuation pattern. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table, (B) and (C) are explanatory diagrams showing a big hit type determination table, and (D) is an explanatory diagram showing a small hit type determination table. (A) is an explanatory diagram of various jackpot types, and (B) is an explanatory diagram of the end conditions of the first high base state and the second high base state. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process for game control. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit opening preprocessing. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during small hit opening. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the base value calculation process. It is explanatory drawing whether or not the prize ball number is added to the prize ball number counter in each situation.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko gaming machine 1 etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1, showing an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting the game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device and is driven into the game area.

A variable display (also referred to as a special figure game) of a special symbol (also referred to as a special figure) as a plurality of types of special identification information is displayed at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the right side of the game area). The first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to be performed are provided. Each of these consists of 7-segment LEDs and the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off.

The "variable display" of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. When the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later is changed, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbols described later, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. The variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinked and displayed. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). In addition, the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or a variable display.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is also referred to as a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a "second special figure game". It should be noted that there may be one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effects images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a decorative symbol (a symbol indicating a number or the like) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbol is synchronized with the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Is variable display. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, up and down) in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the special figure game and the variable display of the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

On the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display in which execution is suspended or an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided. Hold display and active display are collectively referred to as variable display compatible display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable displays on hold is also called the number of stored items on hold. The number of reserved storage corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storage corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second reserved storage number. Further, the total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as a total reserved storage number.

Further, at a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided, and the first hold indicator 25A has the number of LEDs lit. The first hold storage number is displayed, and the second hold display 25B displays the second hold storage number according to the number of LED lights.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning opening that is always kept in a constant open state in which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the first special figure game may be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning opening that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, so that the tip of the movable wing pieces is in a vertical position. Is close to the winning ball device 6A and is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening is closed). On the other hand, the variable-sweep wing device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening because the movable wing piece is in the tilted position when the solenoid 81 is in the on state (second start). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls can be paid out and the second special figure game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to the device including an electric tulip-type accessory.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four locations on the lower left and right sides of the game area), general winning openings 10 are provided, which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and has a large winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state depending on the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for special electric accessory) is off, the big winning door closes the big winning door and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is on, the large winning opening door opens the large winning opening, and the game ball can easily enter the large winning opening. Become.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters, for example, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10.

The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning a prize at the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the left side of the game area). As an example, the ordinary symbol display 20 is composed of 7-segment LEDs and the like, and performs variable display of the ordinary symbol as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from the special symbol. Ordinary symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal pattern is also called a normal pattern game.

On the left side of the image display device 5, a passing gate 41 through which a game ball can pass is provided. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41, the normal drawing game is executed.

Above the normal symbol display 20, a normal symbol hold display 25C is provided. The normal figure hold indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold storages, which is the number of normal figure games whose execution is held, by the number of LEDs lit.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the game machine frame 3, and game effect lamps 9 for game effects are further provided around the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 is configured to include an LED.

A movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided at a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2.

At the lower right position of the game machine frame 3, a ball striking operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to launch the game ball toward the game area by the striking ball launching device is provided.

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, the game balls paid out as prize balls and the game balls rented by the predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to the hitting ball launching device. ) A hit ball supply plate (upper plate) is provided. Below the upper plate, a hit ball supply plate (lower plate) is provided, in which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be gripped and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed and operated by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area so that the player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting the movement (operation, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Outline of the progress of the game)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the rotation operation of the pachinko game machine 1 by the player on the ball striking operation handle 30. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal drawing game is being executed (when the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41 but the normal drawing game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately). , The game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal symbol game, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if the normal symbol other than the normal symbol (the symbol that is out of the normal symbol) is stopped and displayed as the confirmed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol is "out of the normal symbol". When it becomes "per normal drawing", the opening control is performed so that the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period (the second starting winning opening is opened).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special figure game is being executed or during the period controlled by the big hit game state or the small hit game state described later (the start prize has occurred). If the special figure game based on the start winning cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the approach is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a "big hit" and a jackpot symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, "2") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes "small hit". In addition, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", it is controlled to the big hit game state as an advantageous state advantageous for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small hit game state.

In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by letting the game ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A jackpot type is set for "big hit". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and opening upper limit period) of the big winning opening and the gaming state after the big hit game state (normal state, time saving state, probability change state, etc., which will be described later) are prepared, and the big hit is made according to these. The type is set. As the jackpot type, a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained or a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls or almost no prize balls can be obtained may be provided.

In the small hit game state, the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small hit game state, the same opening mode as the big hit game state in some big hit types (the number of times the big winning opening is opened is the same as the number of rounds, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same. Etc.), the big winning opening becomes open. As with the big hit type, the small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

After the jackpot game state is completed, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a probability change state according to the jackpot type.

In the time saving state, control (time saving control) is executed in which the average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure is changed) is shortened as compared with the normal state. In the time-saving state, the average fluctuation time of the normal map (the period during which the normal map is changed) is shortened from the normal state, and the probability of becoming a "normal map hit" in the normal map game is improved from the normal state. Controls (high opening control, high base control) that make it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening are also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is advantageous for the player.

In the probability variation state (probability fluctuation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability variation control in which the probability that the display result becomes a "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probabilistic state is a state that is more advantageous for the player because it is a state in which a “big hit” is likely to occur in addition to improving the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol.

The time saving state and the probability change state continue until any one of the end conditions such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big hit game state are satisfied first. A game whose end condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as a number cut (time cut time reduction, number cut probability change, etc.).

The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state, a time saving state, or a probability change state, which is advantageous for the player, and the display result in the normal drawing game is "normal drawing hit". The pachinko game machine 1 such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game becomes a "big hit" returns to a predetermined state after the power is turned on, such as the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed). It is in the same controlled state as (when the process is not executed).

The state in which the probability change control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which the probability change control is not executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which the time saving control is executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which the time saving control is not executed is also called a low base state. By combining these, the time saving state is also called the low accuracy high base state, the probability variation state is called the high accuracy high base state, and the normal state is also called the low accuracy low base state. The high accuracy state and the low base state are also called the high accuracy low base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state is continuously controlled to the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small hit" (however, "small hit" occurs. If the special figure game at the time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the number of times cut, the game state is naturally changed). It should be noted that there may be no "small hit" as the display result of the special figure game.

The game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big winning opening) during the big hit game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to a probabilistic state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game and enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, and in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and / or the game effect lamp 9 It may be performed by the point or the like / extinguishing, the operation of the movable body 32, or the like.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first 2 In response to the start of the special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as the finalized special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the final decorative symbol (combination of three decorative symbols) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol ) Is also displayed (derived) as a stop.

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display of a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination described later. It is a mode in which is continuing.

In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (display result of the special figure game or variable display of the decorative symbol) to be "big hit" (also called big hit reliability or big hit expectation) is determined according to the production mode. Multiple different types of reach effects are performed. Reach production includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has a higher hit reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration). The display result of the variable display of the symbol is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". ..

In the case of a "probability change jackpot" that is controlled to a probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and displayed as a stop, and the probability change state is entered after the end of the jackpot game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be aligned and displayed as a stop. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a probabilistic symbol, and the even-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a non-probable variable symbol (normal symbol). After the non-probability pattern becomes the reach mode, the promotion effect that finally becomes the "probability big hit" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", a fixed decorative symbol (for example, "for example," "is a predetermined small hit combination as a display result of variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5. 1 3 5 ”etc.) Is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a“ small hit ”). As an example, the decorative symbols constituting the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of big hit game state in the same mode as small hit game state) and when it becomes "small hit". , A common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "off", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode, and the variable display result of the decorative symbol is a fixed decorative symbol of a non-reach combination ("" (Also referred to as "non-reach off") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "non-reach off"). In addition, when the display result is "off", after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a predetermined reach combination that is not a jackpot combination ("reach loss"). The fixed decorative symbol (also referred to as "") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be "out of reach").

The effect that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute includes displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution and a look-ahead notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display (variable display in which execution is suspended) before execution. As the look-ahead notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the usual mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative symbol, and then the variable display is restarted to make one variable display look like a plurality of variable displays in a pseudo manner. The pseudo-continuous production may be executed.

Even during the big hit game state, the big hit middle effect that notifies the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit middle effect, an effect of notifying the number of rounds and a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small hit game state, the small hit medium effect for notifying the small hit game state is executed. It should be noted that the big hit game during the small hit game state and in some big hit types (the big hit type in the big hit game state having the same mode as the small hit game state, for example, the big hit type in which the subsequent game state is a high accuracy state). By executing a common effect depending on the state, the player may not know whether the player is currently in the small hit game state or the big hit game state. In such a case, by executing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is not possible to distinguish between the high accuracy state and the low accuracy state. You may.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with, for example, a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of hold), execution of a normal figure game (including management of hold), and a big hit. It has a function to control a game state, a small hit game state, a game state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105 are provided.

The CPU 103 performs a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing the program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (data such as a fluctuation pattern described later, an effect control command described later, and various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 updatablely counts numerical data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The game random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display 20, first hold). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting (a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the normal figure hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 is a detection signal (a game ball passes or is passed) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23). (Detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering) is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. By transmitting the detection signal, the passage or approach of the game ball is detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for the winning door. To transmit.

The main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) issues an effect control command (a command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game) according to the progress of the game as a part of controlling the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of a special figure game (including a jackpot type)) and a variation pattern used when executing a special figure game (details will be described later). )), The game status (for example, the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the large winning opening, the occurrence of winning, the number of stored memories, the game status), the command for specifying the occurrence of an error, and the like are included.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and produces an effect (various effects according to the progress of the game) based on the received effect control command. It has a function of executing various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery).

The effect control board 12 is equipped with an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 is a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 by executing the program stored in the ROM 121 (a process for realizing the above-mentioned function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed). (Including the decision etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected and an appropriate signal indicating the operation content). It may also instruct the control unit 123.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CG ROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes the effect based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 supplies the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120, so that the effect image is displayed on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating the output voice) to the voice control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Or, a lamp signal (a signal for designating a lamp on / off mode) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let me.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode designated by the lamp signal. To do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting / extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes voice output, lamp lighting / extinguishing control (sound designation signal, lamp signal supply, etc.), and movable body 32 control (signal supply for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 updatablely counts numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used to execute various effects. The effect random number may be one that is updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal) and an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11. It is configured to include the output port of.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operations on the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output ports, etc.), settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on the power supply board, for example. When the power is turned on with the clear switch turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), the initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the game machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether or not the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power interruption), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stop of the power supply. In this power supply stop processing, a processing of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up to the RAM 102, a data protection processing of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes addition of an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data (including various flags, various timer states, etc.) for advancing the game, as well as the state of the backup flag and the error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (used by using an error detection code) and determines whether or not the data is normal (step). S5). In step S5, for example, it is determined by the parity bit or the checksum whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply is stopped. When it is determined that these match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, so the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply is stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents (contents of the backed up data) of the RAM 102. As a result, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is changing, the change of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing recovery from the power failure to the effect control board 12 (step S7). In accordance with this, an effect control command that specifies the game state before the power failure that is backed up, and an effect control that specifies the display result of the special figure game that is being executed when the special figure game is being executed. You may want to send a command. For these commands, the same commands that are set to be transmitted in the special symbol process processing described later can be used. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command that specifies the time of recovery from the power failure, the image display device 5, for example, notifies that the image display device 5 has recovered from the power failure or is recovering from the power failure. Display the screen to do so. The effect control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the effect control command.

After the restoration process or the initialization process is completed and the effect control command is transmitted to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer is interrupted periodically every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and interrupts are permitted (step S12). ). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, the CPU 103 executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to perform the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, the jackpot information (information indicating the number of times the jackpot has occurred) and the start information (starting) supplied to the hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. Data such as information such as the number of times of winning and the probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times of the probability change state) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process (step S25). By executing the special symbol process process for each timer interrupt by the CPU 103, it is possible to manage the execution and hold of the special symbol game, control the big hit game state and the small hit game state, control the game state, and the like (for details, see See below).

Following the special symbol process processing, the normal symbol process processing is executed (step S26). By executing the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 manages the execution and hold of the normal figure game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 41). It enables opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per-figure". The execution of the normal figure game is performed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of normal figure reservations is displayed by turning on the normal figure hold display 25C.

After the normal symbol process process is executed, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes the command control process (step S27). The CPU 103 may send and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the hold storage number is executed. When the start winning is generated, the display result (including the jackpot type) and the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted and stored as hold information. Further, a process of pre-reading and determining a display result or a fluctuation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After the hold information and the number of hold storages are stored, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the judgment result such as the generation of the start winning prize, the number of hold storages, and the look-ahead judgment is made on the effect control board 12. .. The effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. Is transmitted to.

After executing the start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is set to "big hit" or "small hit" based on the random value for determining the display result, and the big hit type when the display result is set to "big hit". Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a fixed special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or an outlier symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. In addition, the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). Further, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the starting condition of the special figure game may be satisfied in the winning order (also referred to as winning order digestion).

When making various determinations based on the random number value, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (a table in which the determination value to be compared with the random number value is assigned to the determination result) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this fluctuation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is used by using a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a preliminary determination result of whether or not the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". The process of deciding on is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The fluctuation pattern includes the execution time of the special symbol game (special symbol fluctuation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol (presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. The content of the effect (type of reach effect, etc.) is specified, and it is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. In this special symbol change processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are set to change the special symbol, and the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol. It includes processing to measure. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, and stop display (derive) the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. Contains the process of making settings for. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is "off", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "missing", the game state is also updated when the time saving state or the probability change state is controlled and the end of the number of cuts is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot release preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening by starting the execution of the round in the big hit game state based on the display result being "big hit". It has been. When the large winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the open upper limit period for keeping the big winning opening in the open state and the upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to which type of big hit. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing ends.

The process of opening the jackpot in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In this big hit opening process, the big winning opening is measured based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the device from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6" after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door. End the processing while the jackpot is open.

The post-processing after opening the jackpot in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this post-opening process of the jackpot, a process of determining whether or not the number of executions of the round that opens the jackpot has reached the set upper limit execution number, and a jackpot game state when the upper limit execution number is reached. It includes processing to make settings to terminate. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of round executions reaches the upper limit, the special figure process flag is set. The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the post-launch processing is completed.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this jackpot end process, there is a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as an effect action for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing to make various settings to start control and time reduction control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end processing ends.

The small hit release preprocessing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. This small hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting the large winning opening to be in the open state in the small hit game state based on the display result being "small hit". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit release preprocessing ends.

The small hit opening process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In this small hit opening process, it is the timing to measure the elapsed time from the opening state of the big winning opening and to return the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing to determine whether or not it is. When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small hit game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the processing during the small hit opening process ends.

The small hit end process in step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. The small hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit game state is executed has elapsed. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small hit end process ends.

(Main operation of the effect control board 12)
Next, the main operations of the effect control board 12 will be described. When the effect control board 12 receives the power supply voltage from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 6 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71) to clear the RAM 122, set various initial values, and press the effect control board 12. Set the registers of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). In addition, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register setting of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Further, on the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt disabled, but if a CPU that is not automatically interrupt disabled is used, an interrupt occurs. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt enable, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that which effect control command is received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process process or the like. Turn on the provided receive flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitting body such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, and a movable body 32. Controls are performed to operate various production devices such as the driving operation of the LED. Further, regarding the control content of the effect operation using various effect devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the effect control command or the like transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process process in step S76, the effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by the software. After that, the process returns to the process of step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the read-ahead notice setting process (step S161). In the look-ahead advance notice setting process, for example, determination, determination, and setting for executing the look-ahead advance notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold storages specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to, for example, the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command for designating the start of the variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. are included. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (fixed decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the reach effect, and various types are based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. It is determined whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are executed, their modes, and the execution start timing. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result and the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of the decorative symbol, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is completed. The display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 in response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , Driving the movable body 32, outputting voice and sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting the command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and commanding the lamp control board 14 (illumination signal). Various effect controls are executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on / off / blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED according to the output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command is received from the main board 11 to specify that the fixed decorative symbol is to be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, the final decorative symbol, which is the display result of the decorative symbol, is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the effect process during variable display ends.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command that specifies to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when the effect control command for specifying the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command specifies the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to "6". Update to. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small hit medium effect process. In addition, when the reception waiting time of the command elapses without receiving the command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "missing". Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the waiting process for hitting the special figure ends.

The small hit medium effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “4”. In this small hit medium effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set content. .. Further, in the small hit middle effect processing, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify that the small hit game state is terminated, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small hit end effect. Update to a certain "5" and end the small hit medium production process.

The small hit end effect process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the setting contents. To execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end effect process is terminated.

The jackpot effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this big hit middle effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set content. Further, in the big hit middle effect processing, for example, the value of the effect control process flag is set to the value corresponding to the ending effect process in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify the end of the big hit game state. Update to 7 ”and end the production process during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Run. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process ends.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic explanation is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, but the game medium is enclosed and a score is given based on the occurrence of the prize. It may be an enclosed gaming machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko game machine 1 is shown as a game machine, but a medal is inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player When a symbol is stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by, if the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus) The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed and provided by the detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the computer device and the like in advance. It may take the form of being distributed by installing it in the storage device of the. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from another device on the network connected via the communication line or the like by providing the communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The execution mode of the game is not limited to the one executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but can be executed by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via the communication line or the like in the internal memory or the like. It may be executed directly using the hardware resources of other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In addition, in this specification, one of the expressions for comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of the production (expressions such as "high", "low", and "differentiate") is "0%". It may be included. For example, one may have a proportion of "0%" and the other may have a proportion of "100%" or less than "100%".

(Explanation of Feature 103SG of the present embodiment)
Next, the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment will be described. In the description of each step of the flowchart in the present embodiment, for example, the part described as "step S1" may be abbreviated as "S1" or "103SGS1", or "normal reach" may be abbreviated as "N reach". "Super reach" may be abbreviated as "S reach" or "SP reach". Further, for a configuration similar to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the basic description or having a different form, arrangement position, etc. but having the same function, detailed description will be omitted by adding the same reference numerals. In the following, the front side of FIG. 1 is the front (front, front) side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the back side is the back (rear) side, and the vertical and horizontal directions when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is viewed from the front side. It will be explained as a standard. The front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment is a facing surface facing the player playing the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

Next, the gaming machine according to the first embodiment in the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-1 to 8-19.

First, FIG. 8-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment, and shows the layout of the main members. As shown in FIGS. 8-1 and 8-3, the pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into an outer frame 103SG001a formed in a vertically long square frame shape and a gaming board (gauge) constituting the game board surface. It is composed of a board) 2 and a game machine frame (underframe) 103SG003 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device and is driven into the game area. Further, in the game machine frame 103SG003, between a door opening position in which a glass door frame 103SG003a having a glass window opens the front surface of the game machine frame 103SG003 centering on the left side and a door closing position in which the front surface is closed. It is rotatably provided, and the game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 103SG003a, and when the glass door frame 103SG003a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

Further, the game machine frame 103SG003 can be opened by inserting the door key owned by the game machine clerk or the like into a lock (not shown) and unlocking it, and the player other than the clerk can open the game machine frame 103SG003 and the glass. The door frame 103SG003a cannot be opened.

The left game area 103SG002L is a game area in which the (left-handed) game ball launched relatively weakly by the operation of the hitting operation handle 30 flows down, and the right game area 103SG002R is the left game area 103SG002L by the operation of the hitting operation handle 30. This is a game area in which the (right-handed) game ball launched more strongly than the game ball flowing down passes through the upper path 103SG002C of the image display device 5 and flows down.

Further, a general winning opening 10 is arranged in the left game area 103SG002L, and in the right game area 103SG002R, a passing gate 41, a variable winning ball device 6B, and a general winning ball device 6B are arranged from the upstream side to the downstream side of the right game area 103SG002R. A winning opening 10 and a special variable winning ball device 7 are arranged. That is, the game ball flowing down the left game area 103SG002L can win a prize in the first starting winning opening formed by the general winning opening 10 and the winning ball device 6A, and the game ball flowing down the right game area 103SG002R is variable. It is possible to win a prize in the second starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6B, the general winning opening 10 and the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7, and it is possible to pass through the passing gate 41.

As shown in FIG. 8-1, a plurality of obstacle nails 103SGK1 are arranged between the winning ball device 6A, the variable winning ball device 6B, and the special variable winning ball device 7. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the left game area 103SG002L cannot win the second start winning opening or the large winning opening, and the game ball flowing down the right game area 103SG002R cannot win the first starting winning opening. It has become.

As shown in FIGS. 8-2 and 8-3, the main substrate 11 in the feature portion 103SG of the present embodiment is housed in the substrate case 103SG201 which is configured to be openable by the first member and the second member. It is mounted on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the state. Further, on the main board 11, a lock switch 103SG051 for switching the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to a changeable set value change state, a jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) described later in the set value change state, and the like are used. A setting changeover switch 103SG052 that functions as a setting switch for changing a set value, and an open sensor 103SG090 that detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 103SG003 are provided. Although the details will be described later, the set value change state in the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment is a state in which a clerk of the game hall or the like can confirm the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (set value confirmation state). ).

The setting switching main body unit provided with the operation unit that can be operated by the player such as the lock switch 103SG051 and the setting changeover switch 103SG052 is housed in the board case 103SG201 together with the main board 11, and the lock switch 103SG051 and the setting changeover switch 103SG052. Is exposed to the back side through an opening formed in the back surface of the board case 103SG201 so that it can be operated without opening the board case 103SG201.

Since the board case 103SG201 having the lock switch 103SG051 and the setting changeover switch 103SG052 is provided on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is extremely difficult to operate the gaming machine frame 103SG003 in the closed state, and a predetermined door key is pressed. The operation can be performed by opening the gaming machine frame 103SG003. Further, since the lock switch 103SG051 requires the operation of the setting key owned by the clerk of the amusement park or the like, only the clerk who possesses the setting key can operate the lock switch 103SG051. The lock switch 103SG051 is also a switch capable of executing an ON / OFF switching operation described later by using a setting key. Although the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment illustrates a mode in which the door key and the setting key are separate keys, one key may be used in combination.

Further, on the board case 103SG201, a display monitor 103SG029 capable of displaying a set value and a base value described later is arranged. The display monitor 103SG029 is connected to the main board 11 and is arranged on the upper part of the board case 103SG201. That is, the display monitor 103SG029 is arranged in front of the main board 11 in the board case 103SG201 when visually recognizing it. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized when the gaming machine frame 103SG003 is not opened, the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized is the back surface side of the gaming board 2 when the gaming machine frame 103SG003 is opened. This is the front when visually recognizing, and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized and the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-1 and 8-2, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a predetermined position (for example, a lower left position of the gaming area) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment. 1 First special symbol display device 103SG004A capable of variable display of 1 special symbol, 2nd special symbol display device 103SG004B capable of executing variable display of 2nd special symbol, 1st hold display capable of displaying 1st reserved storage number Device 103SG025A, 2nd hold indicator 103SG025B capable of displaying the 2nd hold storage number, normal symbol display 103SG020 capable of executing variable display of normal symbol, normal figure hold indicator 103SG025C capable of displaying the normal symbol hold storage number, In the game state where the round display 103SG131 that can display the number of rounds (big hit type) of the big hit game during the big hit game, and the game ball such as the high base state (time saving state) or the big hit game state is launched toward the right game area 103SG002R. A game information display unit 103SG200 is provided in which a right-handed lamp 103SG132 that lights up, a probability change lamp 103SG133 that lights up when in a probability change state, and a time reduction lamp 103SG134 that lights up in a high base state (time reduction state) are collectively arranged.

The first special symbol display device 103SG004A and the second special symbol display device 103SG004B are each composed of 8-segment LEDs. Further, in the first special symbol display device 103SG004A and the second special symbol display device 103SG004B, when the variable display result of the special symbol is out of alignment or a small hit, the variable display result can be derived and displayed by a common combination. ing.

In the case where the variable display result is a big hit in the variable display of the first special symbol, the first special symbol display device 103SG004A has a variable display result with two types of big hit symbols (combination of lit LEDs) for each big hit type. Derived display is possible. Further, in the case where the variable display result is a big hit in the variable display of the second special symbol, the second special symbol display device 103SG004B is variablely displayed by two kinds of big hit symbols (combination of lit LEDs) for each big hit type. The result and derivation can be displayed.

In the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment, the jackpot symbols that can be derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 103SG004A and the second special symbol display device 103SG004B are all different, but the first special symbol display device 103SG004A At least a part of the jackpot symbol that can be derived and displayed in the above and the jackpot symbol that can be derived and displayed by the second special symbol display device 103SG004B may overlap.

In the first hold indicator 103SG025A and the second hold indicator 103SG025B, LEDs of four segments are arranged in parallel in the left-right direction. In these first hold display 103SG025A and second hold display 103SG025B, if the number of hold storage is one, only the LED at the left end lights up, and each time the number of hold storage increases, it is the second from the left. The third LED from the left and the fourth LED from the left light up in sequence. Then, each time the variable display is executed, the LED on the hold display corresponding to the variable display is set in a predetermined shift direction (characteristic of the present embodiment) according to the decrease (consumption) of the hold memory. In the unit 103SG, the lights are turned off toward the left).

In the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment, when both the first special figure holding memory and the second special figure holding storage exist, the variable display based on the second special figure holding storage is preferentially executed. It has become like. Therefore, for example, when one first special figure hold memory exists and two second special figure hold memories exist (only the LED at the left end of the first hold indicator 103SG025A is lit and the second hold is held. (When the two LEDs on the left of the display 103SG25B are lit), the first special figure hold is held after the second special figure hold memory becomes 0 by executing the variable display based on the second special figure hold memory. Variable display based on memory is executed.

Further, the round display 103SG131 is composed of five segments (LEDs). As the jackpot types in the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment, a total of three jackpot types are provided: a jackpot A which is a 5-round jackpot, a jackpot B which is a 10-round jackpot, and a jackpot C which is a 15-round jackpot. Therefore, which segment of the segments constituting the round display 103SG131 is lit differs depending on the jackpot type.

The control signal transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control commands include, for example, a display control command used to control an image display operation in the image display device 5, a voice control command used to control sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9. And LED control commands used to control the lighting operation of decorative LEDs and the like are included.

The effect control board 12 in the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment includes a first movable body 103SG321 and a second movable body 103SG322 that can operate between the origin position and the effect position during variable display and the like. The origin detection sensor 103SG331 capable of detecting that the 1 movable body 103SG321 is located at the origin position of the first movable body 103SG321 and the second movable body 103SG322 are located at the origin position of the second movable body 103SG322. The origin detection sensor 103SG332 capable of detecting this is connected to the origin detection sensor 103SG332.

FIG. 8-4 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in the feature unit 103SG in the present embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is set to "0". The command form shown in FIG. 8-4 (A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or a plurality of three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 8-4 (A), the command 8001H is the first variable display start command for designating the start of the variable display in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 103SG004A. .. The command 8002H is a second variable display start command for designating the start of the variable display in the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 103SG004B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. This is a fluctuation pattern specification command that specifies a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) such as a symbol. Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the content of instruction by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern to be specified.

The command 8CXXXH is a variable display result notification command, and is an effect control command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (B), the determination result (predetermined result) of whether the variable display result is "missing", "big hit", or "small hit". ) Or, different EXT data are set according to the determination result (big hit type determination result) of which of a plurality of types the jackpot type is set when the variable display result is "big hit".

In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (B), the command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command indicating a predetermined result indicating that the variable display result is “missing”. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit A" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit B" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit C" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command for notifying the predetermined result that the variable display result is a "small hit".

The command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command for designating the change stop (confirmation) of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a game state designation command for designating the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, different EXT data are set according to, for example, the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a specific example, the command 9500H is the first game state specification command corresponding to the game state (low base state, normal state) in which the time reduction control is not performed, and the command 9501H is the game state (high base state) in which the time reduction control is performed. , Time saving state) is used as the second game state specification command.

The command 96XXH is an error (abnormal) designation command that specifies the occurrence of an error (abnormality) and the type of the error (abnormality) that has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the error (abnormality) designation command, for example, by setting the EXT data corresponding to each error (abnormality), it is specified which error (abnormality) has been determined on the effect control board 12 side. The occurrence of the specified error (abnormality) can be notified by the error notification process described later.

The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as a "fanfare command") for designating the display of an effect image indicating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state. The command A1XXH is a notification command during the opening of the big winning opening that notifies that the big winning opening is in the open state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after opening the big winning opening that notifies that the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit game state or the small hit game state.

In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determination result and the jackpot type determination result, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result notification command. .. Alternatively, in the hit start designation command or the hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result notification command. .. In the notification command while the big winning opening is open and the notification command after opening the big winning opening, different EXT data is set according to the number of rounds executed (for example, "1" to "15") in the big hit game state or the small hit game state. Will be done.

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the starting winning (first starting winning) is generated. This is a first start opening winning designation command for notifying that the first start condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 103SG004A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) is generated. , The second start opening winning designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 103SG004B is satisfied.

The command C1XXH is a first hold storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure hold storage number in order to display the special figure hold storage number identifiable on the image display device 5 or the like. The command C2XXH is a second reserved storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure reserved storage number in order to display the special figure reserved storage number identifiable on the image display device 5 or the like. The first hold memory number notification command is, for example, when the first start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The second hold memory number notification command is, for example, when the second start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In addition, the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command are used in the special figure game when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the hold storage number decreases). It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

Instead of the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command, the total hold storage number notification command for notifying the total hold storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total hold storage number notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) of the total hold storage number.

The command D0XXH is a setting value designation command for designating the newly set setting value from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120). The command E101H is a hot start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started without clearing the contents of the RAM 102 (recovery of power failure, also referred to as hot start). The command E102H is a cold start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has cleared the contents of the RAM 102 and started (cold start).

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which is a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing game control programs, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. The RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides the area, the CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes the game control program to perform the control operation, and the numerical data indicating the random value are updated independently of the CPU 103. It is configured to include a random number circuit 104 to perform, an I / O (Input / Output port) 105, and a real-time clock (RTC) 106 capable of outputting time information.

As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 is executed by executing the program read from the ROM 101 by the CPU 103. At this time, a fixed data read operation in which the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, a variable data writing operation in which the CPU 103 writes various variable data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores them, and various variable data temporarily stored in the RAM 102 by the CPU 103. The variable data read operation, the CPU 103 receives input of various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, and the CPU 103 goes to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105. A transmission operation that outputs various signals is also performed.

FIG. 8-5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value counted on the side of the main board 11. As shown in FIG. 8-5, in the feature unit 103SG of this embodiment, in addition to the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the fluctuation pattern on the main board 11 side. Numerical data indicating each of the random value MR3 for determination, the random value MR4 for determining the normal map display result, and the random value MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 is controlled so as to be countable. In addition, random values other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. These random number values MR1 to MR5 may be counted by software update using different random counters in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

In the present embodiment, each random value MR1 to MR5 is used as a value in the range shown in FIG. 8-5, but the present invention is not limited to this, and each random value is not limited to this. The range of MR1 to MR5 may be different depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

FIG. 8-6 shows the fluctuation pattern in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is "off", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol corresponds to the case of "non-reach" and the case of "reach", and is variable. A plurality of fluctuation patterns are prepared in advance in response to a case where the display result is a "big hit". Further, 1 variation pattern is prepared in advance in response to a case where the variable display result is a “small hit”. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off" and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern"). The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "out of reach" and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is "reach" is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "out of reach variation pattern"). Further, the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern are included in the missed fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “off”. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "big hit" is called a big hit fluctuation pattern. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "small hit" is called a small hit fluctuation pattern.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the super reach such as super reach α and super reach β is executed. In the present embodiment, only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and like the super reach, the normal reach α, the normal reach β, ... A plurality of normal reach fluctuation patterns may be provided. Further, as for the super reach fluctuation pattern, three or more super reach fluctuation patterns such as super reach γ may be provided in addition to the super reach α and the super reach β.

As shown in FIG. 8-6, regarding the special figure fluctuation time of the normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed in the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment, the super reach fluctuation patterns, super reach α and super reach β, are used. Is set shorter than. Further, regarding the special figure fluctuation time of the super reach fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect such as super reach α and super reach β in the present embodiment is executed, the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect of super reach β is executed is In this case, the special figure fluctuation time is set longer than the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect of the super reach α is executed.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the variable display result is set to be "big hit" in the order of super reach β, super reach α, and normal reach, so that the big hit expectation is set to be high. In the super reach fluctuation pattern, the longer the fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of a big hit.

In the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment, as will be described later, these fluctuation patterns are classified into, for example, non-reach type, normal reach type, super reach type, and the like. Rather than determining the variation patterns to be executed from the variation patterns belonging to the variation patterns belonging to the determined type after determining them first, only the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is determined without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, in addition to the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern type is provided to determine these fluctuations. The type of the variation pattern may be determined first from the random value for determining the pattern type, and then the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the variation pattern belonging to the determined type.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-6, the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment illustrates a mode in which the fluctuation content (effect content) is predetermined for each fluctuation pattern, but the present invention illustrates this. The variation content (effect content) may be different depending on the set value, even if the variation pattern is the same. For example, in the case of the fluctuation pattern PA2-1 out of normal reach, if the set value is 1, the fluctuation pattern is out of normal reach, and if the set value is 2, a pseudo-continuous effect is performed. As a fluctuation pattern that is executed twice and becomes non-reach out of reach, when the set value is 3, the pseudo-continuous effect may be executed three times to make a fluctuation pattern that is out of super reach.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes the program read from the ROM 101, and by using the RAM 102 as the work area, various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are executed. Further, the CPU 103 can generate all of the various random numbers used on the side of the main board 11 by executing the random number generation program.

The ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data and the like used for controlling the progress of the game in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data that constitutes a plurality of determination tables shown in FIGS. 8-7 to 8-11, which are prepared for the CPU 103 to perform various determinations and determinations. Further, the ROM 101 includes table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, and a variation mode of each symbol in variable display such as a special symbol or a normal symbol. A fluctuation pattern table or the like that stores a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is stored.

The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), the second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), and FIG. In addition to the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) shown in -8 (A) and the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. 8-8 (B), the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table and the small hit A fluctuation pattern determination table, an outlier variation pattern determination table, a general map display result determination table (not shown), a general map variation pattern determination table (not shown), and the like are included.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment is configured such that the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) changes according to the set value. More specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing described later, the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) is changed by using the display result judgment table (winning probability) according to the set value. .. The set value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest payout rate, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 the lower the payout rate. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and the smaller the value in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is, the lower the advantage is. In other words, as for the set value, 6 which is the largest value is the most disadvantageous value for the amusement park side, and the smaller the value in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is the more advantageous value for the amusement park side. Become.

8-7 (A) and 8-7 (B) are explanatory views showing a display result determination table. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with MR1 is set for each set value. In the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment, as the display result determination table, individual display result determination tables are used for the first special figure and the second special figure, but the present invention is not limited to this. , The display result determination table common to the first special figure and the second special figure may be used.

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), when the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of the hit judgment values compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33094 are "small". It is assigned to "hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), when the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of the hit judgment values compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33421 are "small". It is assigned to "hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), when the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1253 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33094 are "small". It is assigned to "hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020-1383 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), when the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1253 are assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33421 are "small". It is assigned to "hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". In addition, when the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020-1383 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), when the set value is 3 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of the hit judgment values compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020-1272 is assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33094 are "small". It is assigned to "hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1429 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), when the set value is 3 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of the hit judgment values compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020-1272 is assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33421 are "small". It is assigned to "hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1429 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), when the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of the hit judgment values compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1292 are assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33094 are "small". It is assigned to "hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1487 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), when the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of the hit judgment values compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1292 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33421 are "small". It is assigned to "hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1487 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), when the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of the hit judgment values compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1317 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33094 are "small". It is assigned to "hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1556 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), when the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of the hit judgment values compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1317 are assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33421 are "small". It is assigned to "hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". In addition, when the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1556 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), when the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of the hit judgment values compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33094 are "small". It is assigned to "hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1674 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), when the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of the hit judgment values compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33421 are "small". It is assigned to "hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1674 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As described above, in each display result judgment table, when the game state is the probability change state (high probability state), more judgment values are set than when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). It is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit". As a result, in the probability change state (high probability state) in which the probability change control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the special figure display result is controlled as a "big hit" in the big hit game state in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). Probability to be determined (in the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment, 1/300 when the set value is 1, 1/280 when the set value is 2, 1/260 when the set value is 3, and set. Compared to 1/240 when the value is 4, 1/220 when the set value is 5, and 1/200 when the set value is 6, the special figure display result is set as "big hit" and controlled to the big hit gaming state. Then, the probability of being determined becomes high (in the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment, 1/200 when the set value is 1, 1/180 when the set value is 2, and 1 / when the set value is 3). 160, 1/140 when the set value is 4, 1/120 when the set value is 5, 1/100 when the set value is 6). That is, in each display result determination table, the probability that when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the probabilistic state (high probability state), it is determined to be controlled to the jackpot gaming state as compared with the normal state or the time saving state. The determination value is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state so that

In the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-7, the multiplying factor of the jackpot probability in the probability variation state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state and the time saving state is different (for example, setting). If the value is 1, the multiplication factor of the jackpot probability in the probability variation state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time saving state is 1.5 times, and if the setting value is 2, the jackpot probability in the probability variation state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time saving state is The magnification is about 1.56 times, and if the set value is 3, the magnification of the jackpot probability in the probability variation state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time saving state is 1.625 times). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the multiplication factor of the jackpot probability in the probability variation state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state and the time saving state at each set value is set to be constant (for example, 5 times). May be good.

Further, in each of the first special figure display result determination tables, the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" to the small hit game state is the same regardless of the game state or the set value. Judgment values are assigned as follows. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), in the display result determination table for the first special figure, the special figure display result is set as a "small hit" regardless of the game state or the set value. The probability of being determined to control the gaming state is set to 1/200.

On the other hand, in each display result determination table for the second special figure, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state as a "small hit" is determined regardless of the game state or the set value. Judgment values are assigned so that the values are the same as those in the display result judgment table for figures. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), in the display result determination table for the second special figure, the special figure display result is set as a "small hit" regardless of the game state or the set value. The probability of being determined to control the game state is set to 1/100.

It should be noted that the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment illustrates a mode in which the probability of being determined to control the small hit game state with the special figure display result as "small hit" is the same regardless of the set value. The present invention is not limited to this, and the probability of being determined to control the small hit game state with the special figure display result as a "small hit" may be different depending on the set value. Further, the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment exemplifies a mode in which the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" and the small hit gaming state is different according to the variable special map. The invention is not limited to this, and the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be controlled to the small hit gaming state may be the same probability regardless of the variable special figure.

Here, paying attention to the numerical range of the hit judgment values assigned to the "big hit" and the "small hit" in each display result judgment table, the display result for the first special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. In the determination table, the range from 1024 to 1237 of the hit determination values is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot determination values for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit"), while the set value 2 In the case of ~ set value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is a range of 1238 to 1253 for the set value 2, a range of 1238 to 1272 for the set value 3, a range of 1238 to 1292 for the set value 4, and a range of 1238 to 1317 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the value is in the range of 0 to 65535 when the set value is 1. Of the hit judgment values that can be taken, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "big hit", while when the set value is 2 or more, the common numerical value among the big hit judgment values is common. Numerical values within the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the numerical range are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1238 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (big hit reference value). I will go.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is to determine the small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value of. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, the hit judgment values up to 1020-1346 are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value as described above, while the small The hit judgment value is 32767 to 33094 with 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value) of the small hit judgment value in a numerical range different from the range of the big hit judgment value (1020 to 1346) in the case of the set value 6. Since it is set in the range, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the big hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

Next, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the game state is the probability change state, the range from 102 to 1346 of the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "big hit"), while the set value 2 In the case of ~ set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value is set as a non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the set value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the set value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for the set value 4, and the range of 1347 to 1556 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively.

That is, in the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the probabilistic state, the value can be taken in the range of 0 to 65535 when the set value is 1. Of the hit judgment values, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to "big hit", while when the set value is 2 or more, the common numerical range of the big hit judgment values is set. Numerical values within the range including the non-common numerical range are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1347 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (big hit reference value). I will go.

In the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is in the probabilistic state, the hit determination value is the same as in the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is in the normal state or the time saving state. Of these, the range from 32767 to 33094 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, the hit judgment values from 102 to 1674 are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value as described above, while they are small. The hit judgment value is in a numerical range different from the range of the big hit judgment value (1020 to 1674) in the case of the set value 6, and 32767 is set as the reference value of the small hit judgment value (small hit reference value) of 32767 to 33094. Since it is set in the range, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the big hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result judgment table for the second special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of the hit judgment values from 1020 to 1237 is the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit"), while the set value 2 In the case of ~ set value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is a range of 1238 to 1253 for the set value 2, a range of 1238 to 1272 for the set value 3, a range of 1238 to 1292 for the set value 4, and a range of 1238 to 1317 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment, in the display result determination table for the second special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the value is in the range of 0 to 65535 when the set value is 1. Of the hit judgment values that can be taken, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "big hit", while when the set value is 2 or more, the common numerical value among the big hit judgment values is common. Numerical values within the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the numerical range are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1238 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (big hit reference value). I will go.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is to determine the small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value of. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, the hit judgment values from 102 to 1346 are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value as described above, while they are small. The hit judgment value is 32767 to 33421 with 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value) of the small hit judgment value in a numerical range different from the range of the big hit judgment value (1020 to 1346) in the case of the set value 6. Since it is set in the range, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the big hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

Next, in the display result determination table for the second special figure when the game state is the probability change state, the range from 102 to 1346 of the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "big hit"), while the set value 2 In the case of ~ set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value is set as a non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the set value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the set value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for the set value 4, and the range of 1347 to 1556 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively.

That is, in the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment, in the display result determination table for FIG. 2 when the gaming state is the probabilistic state, when the set value is 1, the value can be taken in the range of 0 to 65535. Of the judgment values, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "big hit", while when the set value is 2 or more, the big hit judgment values are not included in the common numerical range. Numerical values within the range including the common numerical range are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1347 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (big hit reference value). I will go.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit determination value is the same as the display result determination table for the second special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of these, the range from 32767 to 33421 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, the hit judgment values from 102 to 1674 are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value as described above, while they are small. The hit judgment value is 32767 to 33421, with 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value) of the small hit judgment value in a numerical range different from the range of the big hit judgment value (1020 to 1674) in the case of the set value 6. Since it is set in the range, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the big hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

As described above, in the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment, in each display result determination table, regardless of the game state and the set value, the common numerical range or the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are set based on the hit determination value 1020. The judgment value included in the continuous numerical range of 1 consisting of is set as the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, and the continuous numerical range of 1 is based on the hit judgment value 32767 regardless of the game state and the set value (common). The variable display result is judged by using the judgment value included in the numerical range) as the numerical range of the small hit judgment value.

Further, in each of these display result judgment tables, when the fluctuation special figures are the same, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is the same regardless of the game state (the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is Same). Further, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value differs depending on whether the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure (small in the display result judgment table for the first special figure). While the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the hit judgment value is 328, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value in the display result judgment table for the second special figure is about 655. On the other hand, the numerical range of the small hit determination value itself is set to 32767 as a reference value (small hit reference value).

Further, as described above, in each gaming state, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, there is a probability that it is determined that the special figure display result is controlled to the jackpot gaming state as the "big hit". Judgment values are assigned so that the lower the value of the set value and the larger the value of the set value, the higher the probability that the special figure display result will be determined to be controlled to the big hit gaming state as "big hit" (big hit probability: set value 6> set value). 5> Set value 4> Set value 3> Set value 2> Set value 1).

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and when the value of MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the jackpot, the CPU 103 hits the jackpot (big hit) with respect to the special symbol. It is decided to be A to jackpot C). Further, when MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hit, it is determined that the special symbol is a small hit. That is, the winning of the big hit and the small hit is decided with the probability according to the set value. The "probability" shown in FIG. 8-7 indicates the probability of a big hit (ratio) and the probability of a small hit (ratio). Further, determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to control the big hit game state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display device 103SG004A or the second special symbol display device 103SG004B is determined. It also means deciding whether or not to make a big hit design. Further, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to control the small hit gaming state, but the stop in the first special symbol display device 103SG004A or the second special symbol display device 103SG004B. It also means deciding whether or not to make the symbol a small hit symbol.

In the present embodiment, a total of 6 setting values, 1 to 6, are provided as setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine is not limited to this. The set value that can be set to 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more.

8-8 (A) and 8-8 (B) are explanatory views showing a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) and a jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) stored in the ROM 101. Is. Of these, FIG. 8-8 (A) determines the jackpot type using the hold memory based on the game ball winning the first start winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed). It is a table when you do. Further, FIG. 8-8 (B) determines the jackpot type using the hold memory based on the game ball winning the second starting winning opening (that is, when the second special symbol is variably displayed). It is a table of cases.

In the jackpot type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol, the jackpot type is selected from jackpot A to jackpot C based on the random number (MR2) for determining the jackpot type. It is a table referenced to determine.

Here, the jackpot type in the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-9. In the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment, as the jackpot type, the jackpot A (also referred to as non-probability variable jackpot) in which only the time saving control is executed after the end of the jackpot game state to shift to the low probability high base state, and the jackpot game After the end, the high-accuracy control and the time-saving control are executed, and the jackpot B and the jackpot C (also referred to as the probability variation jackpot) that shift to the high-accuracy high-base state are set.

The big hit game state by "big hit A" is a normally open big hit in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state which is advantageous for the player five times (so-called 5 rounds) and is repeatedly executed. The jackpot game state by "B" is a normal open jackpot in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 into the first state which is advantageous for the player. Further, the big hit game state by the "big hit C" is a normal open big hit in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed 15 times (so-called 15 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 into the first state which is advantageous for the player.

The time saving control executed after the end of the big hit game state by the "big hit A" is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment), or the special figure game of the predetermined number of times is executed. Figure Ends when the game is in a jackpot game state before the game is executed.

On the other hand, the high-accuracy control and the time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state of the jackpot B or the jackpot C are continuously executed until the jackpot occurs again after the end of the jackpot gaming state. Therefore, when the big hit that occurs again is the big hit B or the big hit C, the high accuracy control and the time saving control are executed again after the end of the big hit gaming state, so that the big hit gaming state is continuous without going through the normal state. It becomes a so-called consecutive villa state that occurs in.

In the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment, three types of jackpots A to C are provided as jackpot types, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type is 2. There may be less than one type, or four or more types.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-8 (A), in the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol), when the set value is "1", the MR2 determination value ranges from 0 to 299. , 0 to 99 are assigned to jackpot A, 100 to 249 are assigned to jackpot B, and 250 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "2", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 229 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 200-299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "3", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 209 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 150-299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "4", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 189 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 190-299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "5", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 169 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 170-299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "6", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 149 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 150-299 are assigned to jackpot C.

In this way, when a big hit occurs in the special figure game of the first special symbol, the ratio of determining the big hit A in which only the time saving control is executed after the big hit game ends is the same, while the time saving control after the big hit game ends. Of the jackpot B and jackpot C for which both the probability variation control and the probability variation control are executed, the ratio of determining the jackpot C decreases in the order of the set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. That is, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, the ball ejection rate is highest when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, and the set values are 5, 4, 3, 2, and so on. The smaller the value in the order of 1, the lower the ball output rate.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 8-8 (B), in the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol), when the set value is "1", the range of the determination value of MR2 is 0 to 299. Of these, 0 to 99 are assigned to jackpot A, 100 to 199 are assigned to jackpot B, and 200 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "2", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 179 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 180-299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "3", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 159 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 160-299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "4", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 139 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 140 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "5", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 119 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 120-299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "6", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. (A judgment value is not assigned to the jackpot B).

In this way, when a big hit occurs in the special figure game of the second special symbol, the ratio of determining the big hit A in which only the time saving control is executed after the big hit game ends is the same, while the time saving control after the big hit game ends. Of the jackpot B and jackpot C for which both the probability variation control and the probability variation control are executed, the ratio of determining the jackpot C decreases in the order of the set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. That is, when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, the ball ejection rate is highest when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, and the set values are 5, 4, 3, 2, and so on. The smaller the value in the order of 1, the lower the ball output rate.

In the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment, when the variable special figure is the second special figure and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, the big hit type is determined to be big hit B. In other words, if the determination rate of the jackpot type differs depending on the set value, it means that one of the jackpot types is not determined (the determination rate is 0%). Although it is included, there may be a case where the jackpot type is determined to be jackpot B even when the variable special chart is the second special chart and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6. ..

As described above, in the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment, the determination ratio of the jackpot type when the variable display result is a jackpot differs according to the set value, so that the game entertainment can be improved. It has become.

In the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment, the jackpot type is determined by using MR2 which is a random value for determining the jackpot type, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type is not limited to this. It may be determined using MR1 which is a random value for determining the special figure display result.

Further, in the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment, the larger the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player (the jackpot probability increases and the jackpot C as the jackpot type is more likely to be determined). Although the embodiment is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous the player may be.

Further, the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment illustrates a mode in which the jackpot probability changes according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the game playability itself does not change. The game playability is not limited to this, and the game playability may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1.

For example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variation state is 65%, which is the game property (so-called probability variation loop type). When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the gaming ball is a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 during the jackpot game. While controlling the game state after the end of the big hit game to a probabilistic state based on passing through, the game property (so-called V) in which the ratio of the game ball passing through the predetermined switch during the big hit game is different according to the fluctuation special figure Probability variation type), and when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the jackpot probability is 1/320 and the small hit probability is 1/50, and the game is played during high base (during time reduction control). It may be a game property (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type) in which the ball is controlled to a big hit gaming state based on passing through a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7. Further, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 1 to 3, the game playability is the same, but the jackpot probability and the jackpot probability are higher than when these set values are any of 1 to 3. A setting may be provided in which the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the big hit game is small while the small hit probability is high (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6). ..

Further, in the case of changing the game playability according to the set value in this way, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, in the above example, when the set value is 1 to 3, the predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is switched to the effect switch (every time the game ball passes through the predetermined area). It is used as a switch for executing a predetermined effect, and when the set value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch is used as a game switch (a game state is changed based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch). It may be used as a switch for controlling the jackpot game state).

Further, the ROM 101 also stores a variation pattern determination table for determining the variation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the variation pattern is selected from the plurality of types described above according to the predetermined determination result. Determine to one of the fluctuation patterns of.

Specifically, as the fluctuation pattern judgment table, the fluctuation pattern judgment table for big hits used when it is predetermined to set the variable display result to "big hit" and the variable display result to be "small hit". The jackpot fluctuation pattern judgment table used when it is determined in advance and the deviation pattern judgment table used when it is decided in advance that the variable display result is "off" are prepared in advance. ing.

In the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table, the fluctuation patterns of the normal reach jackpot (PB1-1), the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3) are used. On the other hand, a predetermined random number value is assigned as the determination value in the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take.

As shown in FIGS. 8-10 (A) and 8-10 (B), the jackpot variation pattern determination table is a jackpot variation pattern determination table (big hit A) used when the jackpot type is jackpot A. (For big hit) and the big hit fluctuation pattern judgment table (for big hit B and big hit C) used when the big hit type is for big hit B and big hit C are prepared in advance, and these big hit fluctuation pattern judgment tables (for big hit C) are prepared in advance. In the fluctuation pattern judgment table for (for A) and jackpot (for jackpot B and jackpot C), the fluctuation pattern of normal reach jackpot (PB1-1), the fluctuation pattern of super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and the fluctuation pattern of super reach β jackpot For each fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3), a predetermined random value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take is assigned as a determination value.

As shown in FIG. 8-10 (A), in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table (for jackpot A), when the set value is "1", 1 of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 ~ 400 is assigned to the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-1), 401 to 850 are assigned to the super reach α jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-2), and 851 to 997 are assigned to the super reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-2). It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "2", out of the range of MR3 judgment values 1 to 997, 1 to 380 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-1), and 381 to 835. Is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 836 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "3", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 360 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and up to 361 to 820. Is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 821 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "4", out of the range of MR3 judgment values 1 to 997, 1 to 340 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-1), and up to 341 to 805. Is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 806 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "5", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 320 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and up to 321 to 790. Is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 791 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "6", 1 to 300 of the MR3 judgment value ranges 1 to 997 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-1), and the range is 301 to 775. Is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 776 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3).

As shown in FIG. 8-10 (B), in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table (for jackpot B and jackpot C), when the set value is "1", the range of the determination values of MR3 is 1 to 997. , 1 to 200 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach jackpot (PB1-1), and 2001 to 550 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 551 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2). It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β jackpot. When the set value is "2", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 180 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 181 to 510 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 511 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "3", out of the range of MR3 judgment values 1 to 997, 1 to 160 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 161 to 470 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 471 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "4", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 140 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 141 to 430 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 431 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "5", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 120 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 121 to 290 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 391 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "6", 1 to 100 of the MR3 determination value ranges 1 to 997 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-1), and 101 to 350 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-1). It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 351 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3).

In this way, when the jackpot A is won in the special figure game, the ratio of determining the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2) determines the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). It is higher than the set value, and the set values are lower in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1. Further, when the jackpot B or the jackpot C is won in the special figure game, the ratio of determining the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3) determines the fluctuation pattern of the superreach α jackpot (PB1-2). It is higher than the ratio and lowers in the order of the set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1.

That is, in the present embodiment, when the type of big hit is "big hit B" or "big hit C", the super reach β is easily determined, and the type of big hit is "big hit A". In this case, the player is assigned so that the super reach α can be easily determined, so that when the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β is executed, the player may be “big hit B” or “big hit C”. Can raise the expectation of.

Further, in the small hit variation pattern determination table, a predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take is the determination value for the variation pattern of the small hit variation pattern (PC1-1). Is assigned as. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-10 (C), in the small hit variation pattern determination table, the range of the determination value of MR3 is 0 to 997 regardless of the set value of 1 to 6. Of these, 0 to 997 are assigned to the small hit fluctuation pattern (PC1-1). Although only PC1-1 is provided as the variation pattern of the small hit in the present invention, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more variation patterns are provided as the variation pattern of the small hit. The fluctuation pattern of the small hit may be determined from a plurality of fluctuation patterns at different ratios with the set values 1 to 6.

Further, the deviation pattern determination table includes the deviation pattern determination table A used when the number of reserved storages is 1 or less in the low base state in which the game state is not subjected to the time reduction control, and the low base. The deviation pattern determination table B used when the total number of reserved storages is 2 to 4 in the state, and the deviation variation used when the total number of reserved storages is 5 to 8 in the low base state. A pattern determination table C and a variation pattern determination table D for deviation used when the game state is a high base state in which time reduction control is performed are prepared in advance.

In the deviation pattern determination table A, the non-reach deviation variation pattern without shortening (PA1-1), the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), the super reach α deviation variation pattern (PA2-2), and the super A predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take is assigned as the determination value to the variation pattern (PA2-3) out of reach β.

As shown in FIG. 8-11 (A), in the deviation pattern determination table A (for low-base medium total hold storage number of 1 or less), when the set value is "1", the determination value of MR3 is determined. Of the ranges 1 to 997, 1 to 450 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern (PA1-1), and 451 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach out-of-reach variation pattern (PA2-1). 701 to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) out of super reach α, and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) out of super reach β. When the set value is "2", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 430 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and up to 431 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). When the set value is "3", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 410 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and up to 411 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). When the set value is "4", out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997, 1 to 390 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and up to 391 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). When the set value is "5", out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997, 1 to 370 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and the range is 371 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). When the set value is "6", out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997, 1 to 350 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and up to 351 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3).

Further, in the deviation pattern determination table B, the shortened non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-2), the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super A predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can be assigned to the variation pattern (PA2-2) out of reach α and the variation pattern (PA2-3) out of reach β is assigned as the determination value. Has been done.

As shown in FIG. 8-11 (B), in the deviation pattern determination table B (for 2 to 4 total pending storage numbers in low base), when the set value is "1", the determination value of MR3. Of the range 1 to 997, 1 to 500 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), and 501 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-1). , 701 to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) out of super reach α, and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) out of super reach β. When the set value is "2", out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997, 1 to 480 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), and the range is 481 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). When the set value is "3", out of the range 0 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 460 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), and up to 461 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). When the set value is "4", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 440 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), and up to 441 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). When the set value is "5", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 420 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), and up to 421 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). When the set value is "6", 1 to 400 of the MR3 judgment value ranges 1 to 997 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), and the range is 401 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3).

Further, in the deviation pattern determination table C, the shortened non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-3), the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super A predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can be assigned to the variation pattern (PA2-2) out of reach α and the variation pattern (PA2-3) out of reach β is assigned as the determination value. Has been done.

As shown in FIG. 8-11 (C), in the deviation pattern determination table C (for low-base medium total hold storage number of 5 or more), when the set value is "1", the determination value of MR3 is determined. Of the ranges 1 to 997, 1 to 550 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern (PA1-3), and 551 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach out-of-reach variation pattern (PA2-1). 701 to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) out of super reach α, and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) out of super reach β. When the set value is "2", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 530 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), and up to 531 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). Further, when the set value is "3", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 510 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), and up to 511 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). When the set value is "4", out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997, 1 to 490 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), and up to 491 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). Further, when the set value is "5", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 470 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), and up to 471 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). When the set value is "6", out of the range of MR3 judgment values 1 to 997, 1 to 450 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), and up to 451 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3).

Further, in the deviation pattern determination table D, the shortening non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-4), the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super reach α deviation variation pattern corresponding to the time reduction control are performed. (PA2-2), a predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take is assigned as the determination value to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) out of the super reach β.

As shown in FIG. 8-11 (D), in the deviation pattern determination table D (for high base and medium), when the set value is "1", the range of the determination values of MR3 is 1 to 997. 1 to 550 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), 551 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach. α is assigned to the deviation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β deviation (PA2-3). When the set value is "2", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 530 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), and up to 531 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). When the set value is "3", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 510 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), and up to 511 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). When the set value is "4", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 490 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), and up to 491 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). Further, when the set value is "5", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 470 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), and up to 471 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). When the set value is "6", out of the range of MR3 judgment values 1 to 997, 1 to 450 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), and up to 451 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3).

As described above, when the deviation pattern determination tables A to D are used, the ratio of determining the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the normal reach fluctuation pattern is higher than the ratio of determining the super reach fluctuation pattern, and the ratio of determining the normal reach fluctuation pattern. Is set to decrease in the order of the set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. When the deviation pattern determination tables A to D are used, 701 to 900 of the determination values are the fluctuation patterns of the super reach α deviation, and 901 to 997 are the deviation patterns of the super reach β, regardless of the fluctuation pattern determination table. If each variation pattern is assigned, that is, if the variable display result is out of alignment, the super reach variation pattern is determined at a common decision rate regardless of the set value, so the super reach variation pattern It is possible to prevent the effect from being lowered because the variable display is not executed.

In the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment, the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α deviation and the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the deviation of the super reach β are completely the same between the set values as the deviation pattern. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α outlier and the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the outlier of super reach β are between each set value. May differ by a small margin (for example, about 1%).

In addition, in the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment, when the variable display result is out of alignment, the embodiment in which the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach is the same regardless of the set value is illustrated. The present invention is not limited to this, and when the variable display result is out of alignment, the determination ratio of all the fluctuation patterns of non-reach, normal reach, and super reach is the same regardless of the set value. It may be present, or only the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern of either the non-reach or the normal reach may be the same.

Further, in the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment, when the variable display result is out of alignment, the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern of the outlier of Super Reach α and the fluctuation pattern of the outlier of Super Reach β are determined regardless of the set value. Although the embodiment in which both of the determination ratios are the same regardless of the set value is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the variable display result is out of order, the super reach α The determination rate of only one of the deviation pattern determination rate and the super reach β deviation variation pattern may be the same regardless of the set value.

Further, in the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment, when the variable display result is out of alignment, the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern of the outlier of Super Reach α and the fluctuation pattern of the deviation of Super Reach β are determined regardless of the set value. Although the embodiment in which both of the determination ratios are the same regardless of the set value is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and is set even when the variable display result is a big hit. Regardless of the set value, the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach jackpot may be the same regardless of the set value.

In the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment, when the variable display result is out of alignment, a mode in which the determination ratio of the non-reach or normal reach fluctuation pattern differs depending on the set value is illustrated. , Depending on the set value, there may be one or a plurality of undetermined fluctuation patterns among the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the normal reach fluctuation pattern. That is, if the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern differs depending on the set value, one of the fluctuation patterns should not be determined (the determination ratio is 0%), or the specific fluctuation pattern is 100%. It is also included to decide by the ratio of.

The non-reach non-reach variation pattern (PA1-2) has a shorter variation time than the non-reach non-reach variation pattern (PA1-1) without shortening, and the non-reach variation pattern (PA1-2) is shorter than the non-reach variation pattern (PA1-2). The deviation pattern (PA1-3) has a shorter fluctuation time (see FIG. 8-6). Therefore, when the number of reserved memories increases, the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time is determined, so that the reserved memories are easily digested, and the number of reserved memories reaches the upper limit of 4. By winning a start prize while the player is in the game, it becomes difficult for a useless start prize that is not stored on hold to occur, and when the number of stored memories is reduced, the fluctuation time is long and the non-reach is out of reach. By determining the pattern (PA1-1), the variable display time becomes longer, so that it is possible to prevent the game from being less interesting due to the variable display not being executed.

Further, in the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-11 (A) to 8-11 (C), variations are made using a variation pattern determination table for deviation, which differs depending on the total number of reserved storages. Although the form of determining the pattern is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of reserved memories in the special symbol to be changed (for example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the first The variation pattern may be determined using a variation pattern determination table for deviation, which differs depending on the number of reservations of the special symbol and the number of reservations of the second special symbol when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed.

Further, in each of the deviation pattern determination tables of the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment, even if the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 1 to 6, the fluctuation of the super reach deviation The range of random numbers assigned to the patterns (PA2-2 and PA2-3) is the same. However, since the jackpot probability and the loss probability differ depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the rate at which the variable display is actually executed in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach loss (super reach loss). The appearance rate of the fluctuation pattern) differs depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It should be noted that the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment exemplifies a mode in which the rate at which the variable display is executed in the fluctuation pattern out of the super reach differs depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The present invention is not limited to this, and in consideration of the jackpot probability and the loss probability for each set value, the variable display is out of super reach at the same ratio regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It may be executed according to the fluctuation pattern of.

Further, in the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-10 and 8-11, the variation pattern is determined at a different ratio for each set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Although illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the fluctuation pattern may be determined at the same ratio regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

Further, the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment exemplifies a mode in which there is a one-to-one correspondence between whether or not to execute the reach effect and which reach effect is to be executed for each determined fluctuation pattern. The present invention is not limited to this, and whether or not the effect control CPU 120 executes the reach effect based on the special figure variation time of the variation pattern, the variable display result, etc., and which reach effect is executed. You may decide whether to do it by lottery.

The RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 8-1 may be a backup RAM in which a part or all of the RAM 102 is backed up by a backup power source created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 are stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied with power). To. In particular, at least the data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (such as the special figure process flag) and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data according to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for recovering the control state before the occurrence of the power failure or the like based on the data when the data is restored after the power failure or the like occurs. Further, the data corresponding to the control state and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as the data indicating the progress state of the game.

Next, the display of the display monitor 103SG029 in the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment will be described.

As shown in FIG. 8-12 (A), the display monitor 103SG029 includes a first display unit 103SG029A, a second display unit 103SG029B, a third display unit 103SG029C, and a fourth display unit 103SG029D. The first display unit 103SG029A to the fifth display unit 103SG29E are each composed of seven segments composed of seven segments drawing the character "8" and dots arranged on the lower right side of the seven segments. The first display unit 103SG029A to the fifth display unit 103SG29E can be lit and blinked in various colors such as red, blue, green, yellow, and white, respectively. It is also possible to display different colors or so-called rainbows while changing these colors in an extremely short cycle.

It should be noted that the display control of the display monitor 103SG029 in the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment is executed by using the areas not subject to the test in the entire area of the ROM 101 and the RAM 102 at the time of testing the pachinko gaming machine 1. ..

As shown in FIGS. 8-12 (B) and 8-12 (C), the display monitor 103SG029 has a base value calculated in a normal state (low accuracy and low base state) for each out 6000 balls in all game states. Base L (real-time value during measurement), base 1 which is a base value calculated in the normal state (low probability low base state) for each out 6000 balls in the first out 6000 balls in all game states, and base 1 in all game states. Base 2 which is the base value calculated in the normal state (low probability low base state) for each of the second out 6000 balls, and the normal state (low probability low base state) for each of the third out 6000 balls in the all-game state. It is possible to display the base 3 which is the base value calculated in. The base L, the base 1, the base 2, and the base 3 are displayed on the display monitor 103SG029 as a percentage.

When the base L is actually displayed on the display monitor 103SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display unit 103SG029A and "L." is displayed on the second display unit 103SG029B in order to display the abbreviation "bL." Of the base L. Is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values of "00" to "99") are displayed on the third display unit 103SG029C and the fourth display unit 103SG029D. When the base 1 is displayed on the display monitor 103SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display unit 103SG029A and "1." is displayed on the second display unit 103SG029B in order to display the abbreviation "b1." Of the base. Is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values of "00" to "99") are displayed on the third display unit 103SG029C and the fourth display unit 103SG029D. When the base 2 is displayed on the display monitor 103SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display unit 103SG029A and "2." is displayed on the second display unit 103SG029B in order to display the abbreviation "b2." Of the base. Is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values of "00" to "99") are displayed on the third display unit 103SG029C and the fourth display unit 103SG029D. When the base 3 is displayed on the display monitor 103SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display unit 103SG029A and "3." is displayed on the second display unit 103SG029B in order to display the abbreviation "b3." Is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values of "00" to "99") are displayed on the third display unit 103SG029C and the fourth display unit 103SG029D.

In the display monitor 103SG029 of the present embodiment, the control of sequentially displaying the base L, the base 1, the base 2, and the base 3 is executed by controlling the main board 11 (CPU 103). For example, the main board 11 executes control to switch the display of the display monitor 103SG029 in the order of base L → base 1 → base 2 → base 3 at 5-second intervals. The display color of each base value on the display monitor 103SG029 is different depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Specifically, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "1", each base value on the display monitor 103SG029 is displayed in white, and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set. When it is "2", each base value on the display monitor 103SG029 is displayed in blue, and when the set value set on the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "3", each base value on the display monitor 103SG029 is displayed in yellow. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "4", each base value on the display monitor 103SG029 is displayed in green, and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "4". If it is "5", each base value on the display monitor 103SG029 is displayed in red, and if the set value set on the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "6", each base value on the display monitor 103SG029 is displayed in purple. indicate. Therefore, the clerk of the amusement park can identify the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 only by checking the display color of the display monitor 103SG029 without the CPU 103 executing the setting value changing process described later. ing.

Next, the game control main process in the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 8-13 is a flowchart showing the game control main process executed by the CPU 103. In the game control main process, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (103SGSa001). Subsequently, the necessary initial settings are performed (103SGSa002). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output ports, etc.), settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (107SGSa003) and whether or not the RAM 102 (backup RAM) is normal (107SGSa004). If the backup data is not stored (103SGSa003; N) or the RAM 102 is not normal (103SGSa004; N), the process proceeds to 103SGSa017, and if the backup data is stored and the RAM 102 is normal (103SGSa003; Y, 103SGSa004; Y) further determines whether the set value stored in the RAM 102 is any of 1 to 6, that is, whether the set value of a normal value is stored in the RAM 102 (103SGSa005).

If the set value stored in the RAM 102 is not any of 1 to 6 (103SGSa005; N), the process proceeds to 103SGsa017, and if the set value stored in the RAM 102 is any of 1 to 6 (103SGsa005; N). Y) indicates whether or not the setting value changing flag indicating that the setting value changing process described later was being executed before the power failure (the power failure occurred during the execution of the setting value changing process) is set. Is determined (103SGSa006). If the setting value changing flag is set (103SGSa006; Y), the process proceeds to 103SGSa017, and if the setting value changing flag is not set, the RAM clear flag indicating that the RAM clear processing described later has been executed is set. If it is set, the RAM clear flag is cleared (103SGSa007), and it is determined whether or not the clear switch is ON, that is, whether or not the pachinko game machine 1 is activated while the clear switch is being operated. (103SGSa008).

When the clear switch is ON (103SGSa008; Y), the RAM clear flag is set and the process proceeds to 103SGSa011 (103SGSa010). When the clear switch is OFF (103SGSa008; N), 103SGSa010 is set to 103SGSa011 without executing 103SGSa010. move on.

In 103SGsa011, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch 103SG051 is ON (103SGSa011). When the lock switch 103SG051 is ON (103SGSa011; Y), it is further determined whether or not the release sensor 103SG090 is ON (103SGSa012). When the release sensor 103SG090 is ON, that is, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started with the lock switch 103SG051 ON and the game machine frame 103SG003 open (103SGSa012; Y), the RAM clear flag is set. (103SGSa013a).

When the RAM clear flag is set (103SGSa013a; Y), the set value change process (103SGsa013b) for changing the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed to proceed to 103SGSa013d, and the RAM clear flag is set. If is not set (103SGSa013a; N), the set value confirmation process (103SGsa013c) for confirming the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed, and the process proceeds to 103SGSa013d.

In the set value change process (103SGSa013b), the CPU 103 first displays the set value currently set on the display monitor 103SG029. Next, every time the setting changeover switch 103SG052 is operated, the setting value is updated and displayed on the display monitor 103SG029. Then, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 103SG029 is updated and stored in the RAM 102 based on the lock switch 103SG051 being turned off, and the setting value newly updated and stored in the RAM 102 can be specified. The command is output to the effect control CPU 120.

Further, in the set value confirmation process (103SGsa013c), the CPU 103 displays the set value currently set on the display monitor 103SG029. Then, the display of the set value on the display monitor 103SG029 may be terminated based on the fact that the lock switch 103SG051 is turned off.

If the lock switch 103SG051 is OFF (103SGSa011; N) or the release sensor is OFF (103SGSa012; N) in 103SGSa011, the process proceeds to 103SGSa013d without executing the process of 103SGSa013a-103SGSa013c.

In 103SGSa013d, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the RAM clear flag is set, that is, whether or not the RAM 102 is cleared (whether or not the RAM clear process (103SGSa009) is executed) when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started this time ( 103SGSa013d). When the RAM clear flag is set (103SGSa013d; Y), the RAM clear process (103SGsa013e) is executed and then the process proceeds to 103SGsa014. When the RAM clear flag is not set (103SGsa013d; N), the RAM clear process (103SGsa013e) Proceed to 103SGsa014 without executing.

In the RAM clear process (103SGSa013e), the CPU 103 executes a process of setting "00H" to all addresses except the address where the set value is stored and the address where the RAM clear flag is stored (set). .. That is, in the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment, as shown in 103SGSa001 to 103SGSa013e and 103SGSa017-103SGSa021 described later, if there is no abnormality in the RAM 102, the address in which the set value is stored and the RAM clear flag are stored. It is designed to clear the contents of all addresses except the dress.

In 103SGSa014, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the RAM clear flag is set again (103SGSa014). When the RAM clear flag is set (103SGSa014; Y), the process proceeds to 103SGSa022, and when the RAM clear flag is not set (103SGSa014; N), the internal state of the main board 11 is stopped (power cut). Performs recovery processing to return to the state of (103SGSa015).

In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents (contents of the backed up data) of the RAM 102. As a result, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is changing, the change of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be. Then, assuming that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has recovered (started by hot start) in the state before the power failure, the CPU 103 transmits a recovery command including a hot start notification command to the effect control board 12, and proceeds to 103SGSa028. (103SGSa016).

Further, in 103SGSa017, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the clear switch is ON, that is, whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated while the clear switch is being operated (103SGSa017). When the clear switch is ON (103SGSa017; Y), it is further determined whether or not the lock switch 103SG051 is ON (103SGSa018) and whether or not the release sensor 103SG090 is ON (103SGSa019).

When the lock switch 103SG051 is ON (103SGSa018; Y) and the release sensor 103SG090 is ON, that is, there is no backup data in the RAM 102, the RAM 102 is not normal, or a normal setting value is not set. However, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a formal procedure by the operation of an employee of the game hall (the game machine frame 103SG003 is opened and the lock switch 103SG051 is turned on, the pachinko game is operated while operating the clear switch. When the machine 1 is started), the set value stored in the RAM 102 is cleared (103SGSa020), and if the set value changing flag is set, the set value changing flag is cleared (103SGSa021). Then, the above-mentioned processing of 103SGSa009-103SGSa016 is executed.

If the clear switch is OFF (103SGSa017; N), the lock switch 103SG051 is OFF (103SGSa018; N), and the release sensor 103SG090 is OFF (103SGSa019; N), the process proceeds to 103SGSa031.

Further, in 2078SGSa022, the CPU 103 transmits a recovery command including a cold start notification command to the effect control board 12 on the assumption that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start (103SGSa022). Then, a cold start notification timer is set according to the period for notifying the cold start of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (103SGsa023), and the cold start notification is started by starting blinking of all segments constituting the display monitor 103SG029. (103SGSa024).

After executing 103SGsa024, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the cold start notification timer by -1 (103SGsa025), and determines whether or not the cold start notification timer has timed out (103SGSa026). When the cold start notification timer is not timer-out (103SGsa026; N), the processes of 103SGsa025 and 103SGsa026 are repeatedly executed, and when the cold start notification timer is timer-out (103SGsa026; Y), all segments on the display monitor 103SG029. Ends blinking (103SGsa027) and proceeds to 103SGsa028.

In the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment, all the segments constituting the display monitor 103SG029 are blinked over the period (for example, 5 seconds) of the cold start notification timer at the time of calling and starting the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and only a part of all the segments constituting the display monitor 103SG029 may be blinked at the time of calling and starting the pachinko gaming machine 1. Alternatively, at least a part of all the segments constituting the display monitor 103SG029 may be turned on.

Then, in 103SGSa028, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process (103SGSa028) that initially sets the random number circuit 104, and causes the game control microcomputer 100 to periodically interrupt the timer at predetermined time (for example, 2 ms). Set the built-in CTC register (103SGSa029) and allow interrupts (103SGSa030). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

Further, in 103SGSa031, the CPU 103 refers to the effect control board 12 based on the fact that an abnormal setting value is stored in the RAM 102 (setting value abnormality error) and that the effect is restored from the power failure during the setting change described later. And sends an error specification command according to the abnormality of the set value (103SGSa031). Further, an error notification execution waiting timer is set (103SGSa032). Then, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the error notification execution waiting timer by -1 (103SGSa033), and determines whether or not the error notification execution waiting timer has timed out (103SGSa034). When the error notification execution waiting timer is not timered out (103SGSa034; N), the processes of 103SGsa033 and 103SGsa034 are repeatedly executed, and when the error notification execution waiting timer is timered out (103SGSa034; Y), a set value error error occurs. The first display unit 103SG029A, the second display unit 103SG029B, the third display unit 103SG029C, and the fourth display unit 103SG029D, which constitute the display monitor 103SG029, are used as notifications (error notifications) of the occurrence of the above or the recovery from the power failure during the setting change. "E." is displayed in each of the above (103SGSa035).

Further, the CPU 103 blinks all the LEDs constituting the first special symbol display device 103SG004A and the second special symbol display device 103SG004B (103SGsa036), and plays a game via a terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. A security signal is output to a management device such as a field management computer, and the process proceeds to 103SGSa032 (103SGSa037). After that, the CPU 103 repeatedly executes the processes of 103SGsa032-103SGSa037 until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off (until the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off by the operation of a clerk at the game hall), and the display monitor 103SG029 , The first special symbol display device 103SG004A and the second special symbol display device 103SG004B execute notification of the occurrence of an error.

As described above, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment recovers from an abnormal set value being set or a power failure during the change of the set value, the display monitor 103SG029, the first Since the special symbol display device 103SG004A and the second special symbol display device 103SG004B are used to notify the occurrence of an error, the clerk of the amusement park or the like can generate an error or set a value from both the front side and the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is possible to recognize that the power failure during the change has been restored. In addition, the occurrence of an error in the pachinko game machine 1 and the recovery from the power failure while changing the set value can be recognized by the management device of the game hall, so that the security of the pachinko game machine 1 can be improved. It has become.

In the game control main process of the feature unit 103SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-13, when it is determined that the clear switch is ON in 103SGSa008 (103SGSa008; Y) or the set value is being changed in 103SGSa021. Although the embodiment in which the RAM clearing process (103SGSa009) is executed after clearing the flag is illustrated, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the present invention is not limited thereto. Is not after determining that the clear switch is ON in 103SGSa008 (103SGSa008; Y) or clearing the setting value changing flag in 103SGSa021, but when it is determined that the RAM clear flag is set in 103SGSa014 (103SGSa014). It may be executed in Y).

8-14 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (S171) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variable start command reception flag is set (103SGS271). When the first variable start command reception flag is set (103SGS271; Y), it corresponds to the buffer numbers "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special figure hold storage in the start winning command buffer 103SG194A. The various command data and various flags that are attached and stored are shifted upward by one buffer number (103SGS272). The contents of the buffer number "1-0" are deleted because they cannot be shifted because there is no shift destination.

Specifically, the shift is made so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-1" of the first special figure hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "1-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-2" of the first special figure hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-1". 1 Special figure The first special figure is shifted so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-3" of the hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "1-2". The various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-4" of the hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-3".

If the first fluctuation start command reception flag is not set in 103SGS271 (103SGS271; N), it is determined whether or not the second fluctuation start command reception flag is set (103SGS273). If the second variation start command reception flag is not set (103SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated, and if the second variation start command reception flag is set (103SGS273; Y), the start is started. Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure hold storage in the receiving command buffer (not shown) at the time of winning are stored in one buffer number. It shifts upward by the minute (103SGS274). The contents of the buffer number "2-0" are deleted because they cannot be shifted because there is no shift destination.

Specifically, the shift is made so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-1" of the second special figure hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "2-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-2" of the second special figure hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-1". 2 Special figure The second special figure is shifted so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-3" of the hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "2-2". The various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-4" of the hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-3".

After executing 103SGS272 or 103SGS274, the effect control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (103SGS275).

Next, the display result (stop symbol) of the decorative symbol is determined according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command) (103SGS276). In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines the stop symbol of the decorative symbol according to the display result specified by the display result specification command, and stores the data indicating the determined stop symbol of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display result storage area. To do.

In the feature unit 103SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the non-probability change jackpot A, the effect control CPU 120 has, for example, an even number of three symbols as stop symbols. Determine the combination of decorative symbols (big hit symbols) that are aligned with the symbols. Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the third variable display result specification command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot B, a plurality of combinations of odd numbers other than "7" (for example, "111") are used as stop symbols. It is determined from a combination of decorative patterns such as "333", "555", and "999"). In addition, when the received variable display result specification command is the 4th variable display result specification command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot C, a combination of decorative symbols (big hit symbols) in which 3 symbols are aligned with "7" is used as the stop symbol. decide. Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the fifth variable display result specification command corresponding to the probabilistic big hit C, the stop symbols are "334" and "778", which are the same chances as the small hit. Decide from the inside. In addition, when the received variable display result specification command is the fifth variable display result specification command corresponding to a small hit, the stop symbol is "334" or "778", which is the same chance as the probability variation big hit C. Decide from the inside. Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the first variable display result specification command corresponding to the deviation, it is a decorative symbol in which the three symbols are not uniform as the stop symbol, and a combination other than the above-mentioned chance eyes. (Out of design) is decided.

In determining these stop symbols, the effect control CPU 120 uses, for example, a stop symbol determination table in which random numbers for determining stop symbols are extracted and data indicating a combination of decorative symbols and numerical values are associated with each other. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol may be determined. That is, the stop symbol may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the numerical value corresponding to the extracted random number.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect determination process shown in FIG. 8-15 to determine whether or not to execute the variable display effect in the variable display (103SGS277).

(Variable display)
As the effect during the variable display, the effect suggests the advantageous state suggestion result that suggests that the game is controlled to the jackpot game state, and the setting suggestion result that suggests the setting value that the CPU 103 performs in the set value change process. It is a production (predetermined production) that can be any of the above. In the feature unit 103SG, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a reach notice (notice effect) suggesting that the variable display mode may become a reach and become a big hit as an effect in which the effect result is an advantageous state suggestion result. is there. Further, as an effect in which the effect result is a setting suggestion result, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion that suggests which of the set values 1 to 6 the set value is. Further, the effect control CPU 120 executes a variable display effect when the effect result can be either an advantageous state suggestion result or a setting suggestion result, that is, both reach notice and setting suggestion can be executed. When it is possible, the reach notice in which the effect result is the advantageous state suggestion result can be executed in preference to the setting suggestion in which the effect result is the setting suggestion result.

As shown in FIG. 8-16, the variable display effect has a plurality of types of effect patterns (effect modes) of patterns PT-1 to PT-9, and the effect control CPU 120 is a variable display effect. When the execution is decided, which of the patterns PT-1 to PT-9 is used to execute the variable display effect, that is, any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-9. It is decided by lottery whether to execute the effect during variable display based on.

As shown in FIGS. 8-18 (A) to 8-18 (C), the effect during variable display starts at the timing when a predetermined period elapses after the variable display of the symbol is started (the timing before the variable display mode reaches reach). Then, a plurality of (for example, eight) images Z1 showing the paraglider on which the passenger rides fade in from the left side of the display area of the image display device 5 and move toward the right side of the display area. By fading out to the right side of the display area, the variable display effect ends. In addition, an image Z2 indicating that a predetermined number of gliders are destroyed and dropped while the plurality of images Z1 are moving toward the right side may be displayed, and a set value is set depending on the number of the dropped paragliders. Or reach is suggested.

Specifically, in the case of pattern PT-1, one body is destroyed and falls, in the case of pattern PT-2, two bodies are destroyed and fall, and in the case of pattern PT-3, three bodies are destroyed and fall. In the case of pattern PT-4, 4 bodies are destroyed and fall, in the case of pattern PT-5, 5 bodies are destroyed and fall, and in the case of pattern PT-6, 6 bodies are destroyed and fall. In the case of pattern PT-7, 7 bodies are destroyed and fall, and in the case of pattern PT-8 and pattern PT-9, 8 bodies are destroyed and fall.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-18 (B) and 8-19 (A), in the patterns PT-1 to PT-8, the timing at which the paraglider is destroyed is the same, and each pattern PT-1 to 1 to 8 is destroyed. The number of paragliders corresponding to PT-8 is destroyed all at once (or a predetermined number may be used). On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 8-19 (B), the pattern PT-9 is a pattern in which a total of eight paragliders fall like the pattern PT-8, but the mode in which the paragliders are destroyed is the pattern PT-. It is different from 8. Specifically, seven paragliders are destroyed at the same timing as pattern PT-7, but the remaining one is destroyed at the second timing after the first timing when the other seven are destroyed. ..

Which of the patterns PT-1 to PT-9 is used to execute the effect period of such a variable display effect, that is, the reach notice or the effect result in which the effect result is an advantageous state suggestion result is the setting suggestion result. Regardless of which of the setting suggestions, the effect of the common mode (for example, the effect of the aspect in which the image Z1 fades in from the left side of the display area of the image display device 5 and moves toward the right side of the display area). Is executed, and a non-common mode of effect (for example, a number of images Z2 corresponding to the effect pattern is an image display device) that can specify whether the effect result is an advantageous state suggestion result or a setting suggestion result. It is composed of a non-common effect period in which the effect of moving downward in the display area of 5) is executed.

In the background where the images Z1 and Z2 are displayed as the effect during the variable display, the decorative symbols are variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, but the decorative symbols are displayed in a smaller size than usual. The small symbol may be variably displayed at a predetermined place. Further, during the execution period of the variable display effect, another notice effect or the like different from the variable display effect may be executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-16, among the patterns PT-1 to PT-9, the set value is 1 for the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 in which the number of paragliders destroyed is 1 to 7. Regarding the patterns PT-8 and PT-9, which are set as a specific pattern (specific mode) corresponding to the setting suggestion suggesting which of the 6 to 6 is set, and the number of paragliders destroyed is eight. It is said to be a special pattern (special mode) corresponding to the reach notice suggesting the possibility of reaching. That is, the effect during variable display has the same effect mode in the common effect period, but the suggestion target differs depending on the difference in the effect mode (the number of paragliders destroyed) in the non-common effect period, and 1 to 7 paragliders. If it is destroyed, it will be a setting suggestion, and if 8 bodies are destroyed, it will be a reach notice.

Specifically, the patterns PT-1 and PT-3 suggest that the set values may be odd (for example, 1, 3, 5), and the patterns PT-2 and PT-4 have even set values. (For example, 2, 4, 6), the pattern PT-5 suggests that the set value may be equal to or higher than the intermediate setting (for example, 3 or 5), and the pattern PT-5. 6 suggests that the set value may be greater than or equal to the even-numbered intermediate setting (eg, 4 or 6), and pattern PT-7 suggests that the set value may be the highest setting (eg, 6). ..

The patterns PT-1 to PT-4 are determined at a high rate when the set value is any of 1 to 4 (low setting), so that any of the set values 5 and 6 (high setting) can be obtained. It is regarded as the first specific pattern {setting suggestion (low), first specific mode} with low expectation that it is, and for patterns PT-5 to PT-6, the set value is any of 5 and 6. In some cases, it is determined at a high rate, so that it is a second specific pattern {setting suggestion (high), second specific mode} with a high degree of expectation that the set values are 5 and 6.

In the feature unit 103SG, the set values 1 to 4 are set as low and the set values 5 and 6 are set as high. However, the set values 1 to 3 may be set as low and the set values 4 to 6 may be set as high. Then, the execution ratio of the effect pattern may be set by setting the setting values 1 and 2 to the low setting, the setting values 3 and 4 to the intermediate setting, and the setting values 5 and 6 to the high setting.

On the other hand, the pattern PT-8 suggests that the variable display of the symbol may be more than reach (for example, normal reach or super reach), and the pattern PT-9 suggests that the variable display of the symbol may be super reach. Suggest.

Regarding the pattern PT-8, the variable display mode of the symbol is determined at a high rate when the normal reach is achieved, so that the expectation of becoming a super reach is low. The first special pattern {reach notice (low), first As for the pattern PT-9, the second special pattern {reach, which is highly expected to become super reach, is determined at a high rate when the variable display mode of the symbol becomes super reach}. Notice (high), second special mode}.

As described above, the effect control CPU 120 has a special mode (for example, patterns PT-8 and PT-9) that suggests that the jackpot game state is controlled, and a specific mode (for example, pattern PT-) that suggests the setting. It is possible to execute a variable display effect based on any one of a plurality of types of effect modes including 1 to PT-7), and a reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 (predetermined effect of a special mode). When any of the setting suggestion (predetermined effect of a specific aspect) based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 can be executed, the reach notice can be executed in preference to the setting suggestion.

In the first embodiment, the pattern PT-8 and the pattern PT-9 are determined when the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach regardless of whether or not the variable display result is a big hit. Since the fluctuation pattern is determined at a higher rate when the variable display result is out of alignment than when it is a big hit, the pattern PT-8 becomes a super reach, that is, the jackpot expectation is a pattern. While the pattern is lower than PT-9, the pattern PT-9 is determined because the super reach fluctuation pattern is determined at a higher rate when the variable display result is a big hit than when it is out of order. , Super reach, that is, a pattern with a higher expectation of big hit than pattern PT-8.

Further, in the first embodiment, in the variable display effect, a mode suggesting the possibility of a big hit or which set value is set depending on the number of paragliders destroyed has been illustrated, but the present invention illustrates this. It is not limited, and the appearance of a predetermined number (for example, 8) or more paragliders without destroying the paragliders may suggest a big hit or a high setting. Further, if it is possible to suggest the possibility of a big hit and which setting value is set, the effect mode can be changed in various ways, for example, the number of characters appearing, the type of character appearing, and the like. It may be something that can suggest a big hit or a set value.

In addition, in the setting suggestion (high) based on any of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 and the reach notice (high) based on pattern PT-9, the last paraglider among the number corresponding to each pattern is destroyed. By outputting a specific sound or emitting a game effect lamp 9 or the like when the player falls, it may be possible to notify that the pattern has a high expectation of a big hit or a high setting.

As shown in FIG. 8-15, in the effect determination process during variable display, the effect control CPU 120 first identifies the variable display result and the variation pattern (103SGS291). The variable display result is a variable display result specification command for specifying the variable display result (off, non-probability change big hit A, probability change big hit B, probability change big hit C, small hit) transmitted from the main board 11 at the start of variable display. Variable display result specification command for storing the variable display result specification command stored in the storage area. Further, as described above, the fluctuation pattern can be specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command stored in the fluctuation pattern designation command storage area.

Then, the random numbers for determining the reach notice type are extracted, and the effect (reach notice) type determination table A shown in FIG. 8-17 (A) is used to determine whether or not the reach notice is executed in the variable display effect. A lottery is conducted to determine the type of reach notice in the case of (103SGS292).

In the effect (reach notice) type determination table A shown in FIG. 8-17 (A), when the fluctuation pattern is super reach, 20 judgment values are assigned to non-execution, and 20 is assigned to pattern PT-8. Three determination values are assigned, and 60 determination values are assigned to the pattern PT-9. That is, when the fluctuation pattern is super reach, the PT-9 is won at a higher rate than when the fluctuation pattern is other than super reach.

When the fluctuation pattern is normal reach, 20 judgment values are assigned to non-execution, 60 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-8, and 20 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-9. There is. That is, when the fluctuation pattern is normal reach, the PT-8 is won at a higher rate than when the fluctuation pattern is other than normal reach.

Further, when the fluctuation pattern is a non-reach or small hit fluctuation pattern, 100 determination values are assigned to non-execution, and no determination value is assigned to the patterns PT-8 and PT-9. That is, if the fluctuation pattern is a non-reach or small hit fluctuation pattern, the reach notice is not won.

By setting the judgment value in this way, when the fluctuation pattern is normal reach, it is easier to win the pattern PT-8 at a higher rate than when the fluctuation pattern is other than the normal reach fluctuation pattern, and when the fluctuation pattern is super reach, it is easy to win. Pattern PT-9 is easier to win at a higher rate than in cases other than the super reach fluctuation pattern.

Therefore, when an effect based on pattern PT-8 appears, it is more likely to be a normal reach variation pattern than a super reach variation pattern, and when an effect based on pattern PT-9 appears, it is super than a normal reach variation pattern. It is likely to be a reach variation pattern. In other words, pattern PT-8 is determined to be a reach fluctuation pattern, but there is a high possibility that it will be a normal reach, so it is considered as a reach notice (low) with a low jackpot expectation, and pattern PT-9 is a super reach fluctuation pattern. Since there is a high possibility that it will be, it is considered to be a reach notice (high) pattern with high expectation for big hits.

Returning to FIG. 8-15, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} has been won as a result of performing a lottery for the execution of the reach notice and the type in 103SGS292. (103SGS293). When it is determined that the pattern PT-9 has been won, the execution of the reach notice based on the pattern PT-9 is determined in preference to the setting suggestion based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 (103SGS294). Proceed to 103SGS304.

If it is determined in 103SGS292 that the pattern PT-9 has not been won, that is, if the reach notice is not executed or the pattern PT-8 is won, the reach notice is not executed or the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low). } Is won, the set value stored in the RAM 102 is read out, and the current set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is specified (103SGS295). Next, the random numbers for determining the setting suggestion type are extracted, and the effect (setting suggestion) type determination table B corresponding to the set value specified in 103SGS295 is used to determine whether or not the setting suggestion is executed in the variable display effect. A lottery is performed to determine the type of setting suggestion to be executed (103SGS296).

In the effect (setting suggestion) type determination table B shown in FIG. 8-17 (B), when the set value is 1, 30 judgment values are assigned to non-execution, and 25 judgment values are assigned to the pattern PT-1. Judgment values are assigned, pattern PT-2 is assigned 10 judgment values, pattern PT-3 is assigned 25 judgment values, pattern PT-4 is assigned 5 judgment values, and the pattern. Four determination values are assigned to PT-5, one determination value is assigned to pattern PT-6, and one determination value is not assigned to pattern PT-7. When the set value is 2, 30 judgment values are assigned to non-execution, 10 judgment values are assigned to the pattern PT-1, and 25 judgment values are assigned to the pattern PT-2. Pattern PT-3 is assigned 5 judgment values, pattern PT-4 is assigned 25 judgment values, pattern PT-5 is assigned 1 judgment value, and pattern PT-6 is assigned 4 judgment values. A determination value is assigned, and one determination value is not assigned to the pattern PT-7. When the set value is 3, 30 judgment values are assigned to non-execution, 20 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-1, and 5 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-2. 20 judgment values are assigned to the pattern PT-3, 5 judgment values are assigned to the pattern PT-4, 15 judgment values are assigned to the pattern PT-5, and 5 judgment values are assigned to the pattern PT-6. A determination value is assigned, and one determination value is not assigned to the pattern PT-7. When the set value is 4, 30 judgment values are assigned to non-execution, 5 judgment values are assigned to the pattern PT-1, and 20 judgment values are assigned to the pattern PT-2. Five judgment values are assigned to the pattern PT-3, 20 judgment values are assigned to the pattern PT-4, five judgment values are assigned to the pattern PT-5, and 15 judgment values are assigned to the pattern PT-6. A determination value is assigned, and one determination value is not assigned to the pattern PT-7. When the set value is 5, 30 judgment values are assigned to non-execution, 5 judgment values are assigned to the pattern PT-1, and 10 judgment values are assigned to the pattern PT-2. Pattern PT-3 is assigned 5 judgment values, pattern PT-4 is assigned 10 judgment values, pattern PT-5 is assigned 25 judgment values, and pattern PT-6 is assigned 15 judgment values. A determination value is assigned, and one determination value is not assigned to the pattern PT-7. When the set value is 6, 30 judgment values are assigned to non-execution, 10 judgment values are assigned to the pattern PT-1, and 5 judgment values are assigned to the pattern PT-2. Pattern PT-3 is assigned 10 judgment values, pattern PT-4 is assigned 5 judgment values, pattern PT-5 is assigned 10 judgment values, and pattern PT-6 is assigned 25 judgment values. Judgment values are assigned, and five judgment values are assigned to the pattern PT-7.

By setting the judgment value in this way, when the set value is an odd number 1 or 3, the patterns PT-1 and PT-3 are won at a higher rate than when the set value is other than 1 or 3. When the set value is 2 or 4, it is easy to win, and the patterns PT-2 and PT-4 are easily won at a higher rate than when the set value is other than 2 or 4, and the set value is 5. Is easier to win the pattern PT-5 at a higher rate than when the set value is other than 5, and when the set value is 6, the pattern PT-6 is won at a higher rate than when the set value is other than 6. It's easier to do. Further, since the pattern PT-7 may be won only when the set value is 6, it is confirmed that the set value is 6 when a setting suggestion based on the pattern PT-7 appears.

Therefore, if an effect based on patterns PT-1 to PT-4 in which the number of paragliders destroyed is 4 or less is likely to appear, it is highly possible that the set value is one of 1 to 4, and the paraglider is destroyed. When the effect based on the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 with 5 or more bodies is likely to appear, it is highly possible that the set value is any of 5 and 6. That is, patterns PT-1 to PT-4 are considered to be setting suggestions (low) that are unlikely to have a high setting (set value 5 or 6), and patterns PT-5 to PT-7 are set to a high setting (set value 5 or 6). It is said that the setting suggestion (high) is likely to be 6).

In the first embodiment, the reach advance notice type determination random number and the setting suggestion type determination random number are random numbers in the range of 1 to 100, and any value in the range of 1 to 100 is extracted. That is, the number of determination values of each determination random number is set to 100 in the range of 1 to 100, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the range of each determination random number and the like should be appropriately determined. Just do it. Further, each determination random number counter for generating each of these determination random numbers is set in the RAM 122, and each determination random number counter is updated for each timer interrupt in the random number update process.

Returning to FIG. 8-15, the effect control CPU 120 performed a lottery on whether or not to execute the setting suggestion and the type in 103SGS296, and as a result, any one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} was obtained. It is determined whether or not the player has won (103SGS297). If it is determined that any of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 has been won, and if the non-execution of the reach notice is won in 103SGS293, the winning pattern PT-5 to PT-7 is selected. When the execution of the setting suggestion (high) based on the setting is uniquely determined and the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is won in 103SGS293, any one of the winning patterns PT-5 to PT-7 is won. The execution of the setting suggestion (high) based on the above is determined in preference to the reach notice (low) based on the pattern PT-8 (103SGS298), and the process proceeds to 103SGS304.

In 103SGS297, if any of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} was not won, that is, if the setting suggestion was not executed or any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 was won. , 103SGS297 determines whether or not pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is won in 103SGS293 based on non-execution of setting suggestion or winning of any of patterns PT-1 to PT-4. (103SGS300).

If it is determined that the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} has been won in the 103SGS300, and if the non-execution of the setting suggestion is won in the 103SGS297, the reach notice (low) based on the pattern PT-8 is executed. Is uniquely determined, and if any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} is won in 103SGS297, the reach notice (low) based on the winning pattern PT-8 is Execution is determined with priority over the setting suggestion (low) based on patterns PT-1 to PT-4 (103SGS301), and the process proceeds to 103SGS304.

If it is determined in the 103SGS300 that the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} has not been won, it is determined whether or not any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} has been won. If the determination (103SGS302) is made and any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 is won, the execution of the setting suggestion (low) based on the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 is determined, and the process proceeds to 103SGS304. Further, when none of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 is won, that is, when the non-execution of both the reach notice and the setting suggestion is won, the variable display is being performed without deciding the execution of the effect. The production determination process ends.

In 103SGS304, the effect type (any of patterns PT-1 to PT-9) determined in any of 103SGS294, 103SGS298, 103SGS301, and 103SGS303 is stored in a predetermined area of RAM 122 (103SGS304), and the effect during variable display is executed. The variable display effect execution decision flag indicating that has been determined is set (103SGS305), and the variable display effect determination process ends.

Returning to FIG. 8-14, after the variable display effect determination process of 103SGS277, the effect control CPU 120 in 103SGS278 determines whether or not the variable display effect execution decision flag is set, that is, the variable display effect determination of 103SGS277. It is determined whether or not the execution of the variable display effect of any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-9 is determined in the process.

If the variable display effect execution decision flag is set, the process proceeds to 103SGS279, and the period until the variable display effect start is set in the variable display effect start waiting timer (103SGS279), and the variable display effect execution is executed. Clear the decision flag (103SGS280) and proceed to 103SGS281. On the other hand, if the effect execution decision flag during variable display is not set, the process proceeds to 103SGS281 without going through 103SGS279 and 103SGS280.

As for the period until the start of the variable display effect, in this feature unit 103SG, the timing at which the paraglider appears is set as the start timing of the variable display effect, and the process table of the variable display effect executed from the start of the variable display effect. Since the variable display effect is started based on the above, an example is shown in which the period until the start timing of the variable display effect is set in the variable display effect start waiting timer. The present invention is not limited to this, and for example, an effect (not shown) showing a precursor is performed before the timing at which the variable display effect is started, and the timing at which the precursor is started is the variable display effect. When the start timing is set, a period shorter than the period until the variable display effect is started may be set in the variable display effect start wait timer.

In the 103SGS281, the effect control CPU 120 selects an effect control pattern (process table) according to the variation pattern designation command. Then, the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (103SGS282).

In the process table, display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R are controlled. The sound control execution data, the operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A, etc. are sequentially arranged in chronological order in association with each process data n (1 to N). There is.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 displays the effect device (image display as an effect component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The device 5, various lamps as production parts, speakers 8L, 8R as production parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) are controlled (103SGS283). For example, the image display device 5 outputs a command to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image according to the fluctuation pattern. Further, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14 in order to control lighting / extinguishing of various lamps. Further, in order to output the voice from the speakers 8L and 8R, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the voice control board 13.

In the first embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern designation command so that the decorative pattern is variably displayed according to the variation pattern corresponding to one-to-one. However, the effect control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern. The fluctuation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns corresponding to the specified command.

Then, a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variable pattern designation command is set in the variable display time timer (103SGS284). Further, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (103SGS285). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms. Each time the predetermined time elapses, the effect control CPU 120 writes the image data indicating the display state of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols to the VRAM, and the display control unit 123 writes the image data to the VRAM. A signal corresponding to the image data is output to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image according to the signal, whereby variable display (variation) of the decorative pattern is realized. Next, the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the effect processing (S172) during variable display (103SGS286).

As described above, in the first embodiment, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display of the symbol based on the reach variation pattern, the predetermined variable display mode is determined after the variable display is started and before the variable display mode becomes the reach mode. At the effect timing, either reach notice or setting suggestion can be executed as the variable display effect, and when deciding whether or not to execute the variable display effect, the effect result becomes the advantageous state suggestion result. It is possible to execute (the effect of the special aspect) with priority over the setting suggestion (the effect of the specific aspect) in which the effect result is the setting suggestion result.

Specifically, as shown in the effect determination process during variable display of FIG. 8-15, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the reach notice is executed and the type of lottery, and whether or not the setting suggestion is executed and the type of lottery. Give priority to.

That is, in the reach notice lottery, when the fluctuation pattern is super reach, the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution of the reach notice (high) based on the pattern PT-9 at a rate of 60% (103SGS294). The notice (high) will be executed at a higher rate (priority) than the setting suggestion. On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern is normal reach, the execution of the reach notice (high) based on the pattern PT-9 is determined only at a rate of 20%, but the reach notice (low) based on the pattern PT-8 is determined at a rate of 60%. Even if the lottery for setting suggestion is executed in 103SGS296 based on the winning of the reach notice (low), the setting suggestion based on the pattern PT-5 to PT-7 is executed in 103SGS297 (high). ) Is not won, 103SGS301 will decide to execute the reach notice (low) based on the pattern PT-8, so the reach notice will be executed at a higher rate (priority) than the setting suggestion. Become.

Further, the reach notice includes a reach notice (low) and a reach notice (high) suggesting that the ratio of being controlled by a big hit is higher than the reach notice (low), and the effect control CPU 120 uses the pattern PT. When both the reach notice (high) based on −9 and the setting suggestion based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7 are feasible, the reach notice (high) based on pattern PT-9 is set to pattern PT-. It is executed with priority over the setting suggestion based on any of 1 to PT-7 (103SGS294). On the other hand, when both the reach notice (low) based on the pattern PT-8 and the setting suggestion based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 are feasible, the pattern PT-5 to PT-7 is selected. It is possible to execute the setting suggestion (high) based on the setting suggestion (high) in preference to the reach notice (low) based on the pattern PT-8 (103SGS298). By doing so, it is possible to prevent the entertainment of the effect during the variable display from being lowered due to the excessive priority given to the reach notice and the restriction on the execution of the setting suggestion.

Further, the setting suggestion includes a setting suggestion (low) and a setting suggestion (high) suggesting that the setting is more likely to be higher than the setting suggestion (low), and the effect control CPU 120 uses the pattern PT. When both the setting suggestion (high) based on any of -5 to PT-7 and the reach notice based on any of patterns PT-8 to PT-9 are feasible, the pattern PT-5 to PT-7 is used. The setting suggestion (high) based on is executed in preference to the reach notice (low) based on the pattern PT-8 (103SGS298). On the other hand, when both the setting suggestion (low) based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-4 and the reach notice based on any of patterns PT-8 to PT-9 are feasible, the pattern PT-8 is set. Based reach notice (low) can be executed in preference to setting suggestion (low) based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-4 (103SGS301). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the setting suggestion from being excessively prioritized and the execution of the reach notice being restricted, so that the interest of the effect during the variable display is lowered.

In this way, the effect control CPU 120 executes the reach notice with priority over the setting suggestion. For details, the reach notice (high) is executed with priority over the setting suggestion (high), the setting suggestion (high) is executed with priority over the reach notice (low), and the reach notice (low) is set and suggested (low). Priority is given to execution over low). That is, the priority of execution of each effect pattern is set to have a relationship of "reach notice (high)> setting suggestion (high)> reach notice (low)> setting suggestion (low)".

In the feature unit 103SG, the execution ratio of the reach notice may be set to be higher than the execution ratio of the setting suggestion. That is, the variable display effect is an effect executed during the variable display period of the symbol, and the reach notice suggests that the variable display result may be a big hit, whereas the setting suggestion is at least. It suggests which setting value is not changed during the business period. Further, it is not preferable for the game hall that the setting suggestion frequently occurs and the player can easily guess which set value is. Therefore, in the case of executing the variable display during effect when the super reach fluctuation pattern and the set value are set high, it is preferable for the player to suggest any of them, but the set value is suggested at another timing. On the other hand, since the jackpot suggestion can be made only during the variable display, it is preferable for the player that the reach notice appears at a higher rate than the setting suggestion.

In addition, since the variable display effect is an effect that is executed only during the variable display period of the super reach variation pattern or the symbol based on the normal reach variation pattern, which has a higher expectation of big hit than the non-reach variation pattern, the variable display mode is the reach. In this case, the player's expectation for a big hit is higher than in the case of not reaching. Therefore, especially in the case of a jackpot reach fluctuation pattern, if the setting suggestion is executed with priority over the reach notice, the player's expectation for the jackpot will decrease and the production will be inappropriate. By giving priority to the setting suggestion to be executed, it is possible to prevent the production from becoming inappropriate.

Further, in the first embodiment, if the reach notice is executed with priority over the setting suggestion as a tendency of the effect during variable display, for example, it is a non-reach or normal reach fluctuation pattern and is high. In some situations, such as when the setting is made, the execution ratio may be set so that the setting suggestion is executed in preference to the reach notice.

Further, in the first embodiment, the lottery for the reach notice and the lottery for the setting suggestion are executed separately, and the lottery for the reach notice is executed prior to the lottery for the setting suggestion (priority). Although illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and if the execution rate of the reach notice is higher than the execution rate of the setting suggestion, the lottery of the setting suggestion may be performed before the lottery of the reach notice. , The order is arbitrary. Further, if the number of judgment values in the effect type determination tables A and B is set so that the execution ratio of the reach notice is higher than the execution ratio of the setting suggestion, it is shown in FIGS. 8-17 (A) and 8-17 (B). It is not limited to what is described.

In addition, in the first embodiment, as an effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display, a mode in which a setting suggestion suggesting a set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be executed has been illustrated. Is not limited to this, and as a setting suggestion, it may be suggested whether or not the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 has changed since the pachinko gaming machine 1 was started last time.

(First invention)
As described above, the present embodiment includes the first invention shown below. That is, conventionally, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, the variable display result becomes a big hit by changing the set value, for example, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. There were some that could change the probability of becoming (the probability of being controlled in an advantageous state). In the game machine described in the above patent gazette, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a set value depending on the type of animal displayed. When either of the setting suggestion effects can be executed, no consideration is given to which effect is prioritized, and the setting suggestion effect to be set as the set value when controlled in an advantageous state is executed. Then, there was a problem that the production became inappropriate. Therefore, for the purpose of providing a game machine that can prevent the production from becoming inappropriate,
The gaming machine of means 1 of the first invention
It can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and is set to one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 6) having different advantages for the player. A possible gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1)
A predetermined effect executing means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can perform a predetermined effect according to any one of a plurality of types of effect modes) as an effect during variable display, in any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7. It has a setting suggestion based on it, or a part that can execute reach notice based on patterns PT-8 and PT-9).
The effect mode of the predetermined effect is a special mode (for example, a reach notice based on the special pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9) that suggests that the predetermined effect is controlled, and a suggestion regarding the setting. Includes specific aspects (eg, setting suggestions based on any of the specific patterns PT-1 to PT-7).
When both the predetermined effect of the special aspect and the predetermined effect of the specific aspect can be executed by the predetermined effect executing means (for example, the timing at which a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the variable display of the symbol (variable display mode). (Timing before reaching)), the predetermined effect of the special aspect can be executed in preference to the predetermined effect of the specific aspect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 may be used in FIG. 8- of the first embodiment). In the variable display effect determination process shown in 15, when the pattern PT-9 is won in the reach notice lottery, the execution of the reach notice (high) based on the pattern PT-9 is determined in 103SGS294 with priority over the setting suggestion. Even if the lottery of the setting suggestion is executed in the part or 103SGS296, if the setting suggestion (high) based on the pattern PT-5 to PT-7 is not won, the reach notice (low) based on the pattern PT-8 in 103SGS301 is not won. ) Is determined with priority over the setting suggestion (low) based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4. / The effect control CPU 120 determines the reach notice (high)> the setting suggestion (high). > Reach notice (low)> Setting suggestion (low) A part that determines the execution of an effect based on any of patterns PT1 to PT-9 at a ratio (see Fig. 8-20 of variant 1))
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, when the control is performed in an advantageous state, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect of a specific mode from being executed and the effect from becoming inappropriate.
Specifically, even when the variable display that makes the variable display result a big hit is executed, the setting suggestion that can be suggested at the timing other than the variable display is executed with priority over the reach notice. , It becomes impossible to raise the player's expectation for the big hit, and it is possible to prevent the production from becoming inappropriate.

The gaming machine of means 2 of the first invention is the gaming machine according to means 1.
The special aspect is a first special aspect (for example, reach notice (low)) and a second special aspect (for example, reach notice) that suggests that the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than that of the first special aspect. (High)), including
The predetermined effect executing means is
When both the predetermined effect of the second special aspect and the predetermined effect of the specific aspect can be executed, the predetermined effect of the second special aspect is executed with priority over the predetermined effect of the specific aspect (for example). When the effect control CPU 120 wins the pattern PT-9 in the reach advance notice lottery in the variable display effect determination process shown in FIG. 8-15 of the first embodiment, the reach advance notice based on the pattern PT-9 in the 103SGS294 ( High) execution is determined in preference to setting suggestions based on any of patterns PT-1 to pattern PT-7),
When both the predetermined effect of the first special aspect and the predetermined effect of the specific aspect can be executed, the predetermined effect of the specific aspect can be executed with priority over the predetermined effect of the first special aspect. (For example, when the effect control CPU 120 wins any of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 in the setting suggestion lottery in the variable display effect determination process shown in FIG. 8-15 of the first embodiment, the 103SGS298. The part that prioritizes the execution of the setting suggestion (high) based on any of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 over the reach notice (low) based on pattern PT-8)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the enjoyment of the predetermined effect from being lowered by excessively restricting the execution of the predetermined effect of the specific mode.

The gaming machine of the means 3 of the first invention is the gaming machine according to the means 1 or 2.
The specific aspect is a first specific aspect (for example, setting suggestion (low)) and a second specific aspect (for example, setting suggestion (high)) that suggests setting of a setting value having a higher advantage than the first specific aspect. )) Including
The predetermined effect executing means is
When both the predetermined effect of the second specific aspect and the predetermined effect of the special aspect can be executed, the predetermined effect of the second specific aspect is executed with priority over the predetermined effect of the special aspect (for example). When any one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 is won in the setting suggestion lottery in the variable display effect determination process shown in FIG. 8-15 of the first embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 wins the pattern PT in the 103SGS298. The part in which the execution of the setting suggestion (high) based on any of -5 to PT-7 is prioritized over the reach notice (low) based on the pattern PT-8),
When both the predetermined effect of the first specific aspect and the predetermined effect of the special aspect can be executed, the predetermined effect of the special aspect can be executed with priority over the predetermined effect of the first specific aspect. (For example, when the effect control CPU 120 wins the pattern PT-8 in the reach notice lottery in the variable display effect determination process shown in FIG. 8-15 of the first embodiment, the pattern PT-8 is changed to the pattern PT-8 in the 103SGS301. The part that prioritizes the execution of the reach notice (low) based on the setting suggestion (low) based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-4)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the enjoyment of the predetermined effect from being lowered by excessively restricting the execution of the predetermined effect of the special aspect.

The gaming machine of means 4 of the first invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3.
An operation promotion notification means capable of executing an operation promotion notification that prompts the player to execute an operation (for example, the effect control CPU 120 performs an operation promotion effect that encourages the player to operate the push button 31B during the operation validity period of the push button 31B. Executable part.) And
An operation detecting means (for example, a push sensor 35B) capable of detecting a specific operation (for example, an operation for operating the push button 31B) by the player regardless of whether or not the operation promotion notification by the operation prompting means is executed. When,
With
The predetermined effect executing means can execute a predetermined effect based on the detection of the specific operation by the motion detecting means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 presses the push button 31B during the operation valid period of the push button 31B. When a specific operation to be operated is detected by the push sensor 35B, the image Z1 is displayed in response to the operation of the push button 31B regardless of whether or not the operation promotion image prompting the player to operate the push button 31B is displayed. A part that can perform the effect of changing to image Z2 (destroying the paraglider and dropping it). Modification example)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, a player who knows a specific motion can execute a predetermined effect at a desired timing by performing the specific motion, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

The gaming machine of means 5 of the first invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 4.
The predetermined effect is a common effect period (for example, a reach notice or a setting suggestion) in which a common effect is executed regardless of whether the predetermined effect of the special aspect or the predetermined effect of the specific aspect is executed. Regardless of the presence or absence, the effect of the mode in which the image Z1 fades in from the left side of the display area of the image display device 5 and moves toward the right side of the display area is executed) and the predetermined aspect of the special aspect. A non-common production period (for example, whether it is a reach notice or a setting suggestion) that can specify which of the production and the predetermined production of the specific mode can be specified, that is, the number of images Z2 corresponding to the production pattern Is a non-common effect period in which the effect of moving downward from the display area of the image display device 5 is executed) (see FIG. 8-18).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, by having a common effect period, it is possible to effectively increase the player's expectation as to which of the predetermined effect of the special aspect and the predetermined effect of the specific aspect is executed. You can improve your interest.

The gaming machine of means 6 of the first invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 5.
The predetermined effect executing means can execute a predetermined effect of a special aspect which is a suggestion of being controlled to the advantageous state and also a suggestion regarding a setting (for example, both a reach notice and a setting suggestion can be executed). Occasionally, a specific image that suggests both a jackpot and the highest setting (setting value 6) (for example, an image in which a paraglider in which a character appears moves while displaying the image Z1 of the paraglider) is displayed. Part etc.)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to effectively increase the player's expectation that the predetermined effect of the special mode or the special mode different from the specific mode is executed, so that the game interest can be improved.

In the first embodiment, the case where both the reach notice (predetermined effect of the special mode) and the setting suggestion (predetermined effect of the specific mode) can be executed is, for example, a suggestion about the display result of one variable display. As long as it is possible to suggest a set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, various timings may be used. Specifically, if the reach notice suggests the display result of the variable display, the reach notice can be executed at any timing during the execution period of the variable display, and the variable display corresponding to the hold memory can be executed. If it is suggested about the display result of, the reach notice can be executed at any timing in the period over a plurality of variable displays until the variable display corresponding to the hold storage is executed and the execution period of the variable display. .. Further, since the setting suggestion is not changed during the business period, the setting suggestion can be executed at any timing during one business period.

Further, when both the reach notice (predetermined effect of the special mode) and the setting suggestion (predetermined effect of the specific mode) can be executed, the reach notice can be executed with priority over the setting suggestion. Priority is given to the lottery of the setting suggestion, and the reach notice based on the patterns PT-8 and PT-9 is executed before the setting suggestion based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7. Includes determining, and performing reach notices based on patterns PT-8 and PT-9 at a higher rate than setting suggestions based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7. Note that executing the reach notice at a higher rate than the setting suggestion includes a case where the reach notice is executed at a rate of 100% and the setting suggestion is not executed, that is, the reach notice is executed at a rate of 100%.

Further, in the first embodiment, the possibility of a big hit or a set value is suggested by the number of destroyed paragliders, that is, the variable display effect that is executed when both the reach notice and the setting suggestion can be executed. As an example, a form in which the effect result is either an advantageous state suggestion result or a setting suggestion result is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is executed when both the reach notice and the setting suggestion are feasible. As the effect during variable display, both the advantageous state suggestion result and the setting suggestion result may be included as the effect result.

That is, in the first embodiment, the variable display effect has a common effect period for the reach notice and the setting suggestion, but the effect mode is different between the reach notice and the setting suggestion (in the common effect period). It may be a separate production (which does not have a corresponding period) (specifically, the reach notice is a suggestion using a character, the setting suggestion is a suggestion by a paraglider, etc.). Then, even when the reach notice and the setting suggestion having different production modes are executed together in the same period (same timing), the reach notice may be executed with priority over the setting suggestion.

(Modification example 1)
Next, the modification 1 in the first embodiment of the feature unit 103SG will be described with reference to FIG. 8-20. 8-20 is a flowchart showing the effect determination process during variable display as the first modification, and FIG. 8-20 is a diagram showing the execution ratio of the reach notice and the setting suggestion.

In the first embodiment, the reach notice is executed with priority over the setting suggestion by prioritizing the execution of the reach notice and the type lottery over the execution of the setting suggestion and the type lottery. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a lottery for reach notice and setting suggestion may be performed using one effect type determination table C (not shown).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-20 (A), in the effect determination process during variable display, the effect control CPU 120 first identifies the variable display result and the variation pattern (103SGS311). Next, while extracting the random number for determining the effect type, using the effect (reach notice / setting suggestion) type determination table C (not shown), whether or not the variable display effect (reach notice / setting suggestion) is executed, and A lottery is performed to determine the type of reach notice or setting suggestion when the execution is performed (103SGS312).

Although not particularly shown in the effect (reach notice / setting suggestion) type determination table C (not shown), the determination ratio of the effect patterns PT-1 to PT-9 is set according to the type of the variation pattern and the number of set values. ing. That is, although the determination ratios of the effect patterns PT-1 to PT-9 differ depending on the type of the fluctuation pattern and the set values 1 to 6, the execution ratios of the reach notice and the setting suggestion shown in FIG. 8-20 (B) are different. As shown in the trend chart, as a whole, the reach notice is determined (priority) at a higher rate than the setting suggestion, that is, the decision rate is set to be higher in the order of reach notice, setting suggestion, and non-execution. (For example, reach notice is determined by 50%, setting suggestion is determined by 40%, and non-execution is determined by 10%).

Further, for example, when the fluctuation pattern is super reach, the reach notice (high) is higher than the reach notice (low) (for example, the reach notice (high) is 40% and the reach notice (low) is 10%). It is preferable to determine with. When the set values are high setting values 5 and 6, the ratio of setting suggestion (high) is higher than that of setting suggestion (low) (for example, setting suggestion (high) is 35% and setting suggestion (low) is 5). %) Is preferable. That is, the effect control CPU 120 is produced based on any of the patterns PT1 to PT-9 at a ratio of reach notice (high)> setting suggestion (high)> reach notice (low)> setting suggestion (low). You just have to decide what to do.

Further, in the first embodiment and the first modification, the embodiment in which the execution rate of the reach notice and the setting suggestion is determined based on the fluctuation pattern and the set value is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited thereto. The execution ratio of the reach notice and the setting suggestion may be different depending on the fluctuation pattern, the set value, and the variable display result. Specifically, regardless of whether the fluctuation pattern is a super reach or a normal reach fluctuation pattern, when a big hit occurs, the reach notice should be executed at a higher rate than when it is missed, prioritizing the setting suggestion. Is preferable.

Further, in the first embodiment and the first modification, when both the advantageous state suggestion result and the setting suggestion result can be executed as the effect result, either the reach notice or the setting suggestion is executed as the variable display effect. Although the possible forms have been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and when both the advantageous state suggestion result and the setting suggestion result are feasible as the effect result, the effect result of the variable display effect is displayed. It may be possible to execute a specific effect that is a specific result that is both an advantageous state suggestion result and a setting suggestion result.

As a specific effect, for example, when a specific image suggesting both a jackpot and a maximum setting (setting value 6) (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-18, a paraglider image Z1 is displayed, a character is displayed. Display an image in which the paraglider in which appears is moving, etc.), or display an image in which the display mode of the paraglider (for example, color, size, movement speed, trajectory, etc.) is different from the normal mode. It may be displayed, the background color may be different, or an effect image may be displayed. Alternatively, a special sound effect may be output according to the image display of the paraglider, or the illuminant may be made to emit light in a special light emitting mode.

Further, in the first embodiment and the first modification, when either the advantageous state suggestion result or the setting suggestion result is obtained as the effect result, that is, either the reach notice or the setting suggestion can be executed as the variable display effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is possible to execute either the reach notice or the setting suggestion in the variable display effect, while the reach notice and the setting suggestion are variable. It may be possible to execute each independently at an effect timing different from the effect being displayed.

Specifically, for example, it is possible to execute a reach notice (for example, a character notice in which a character appears) in a mode different from the reach notice shown in FIGS. 8-18 at a different production timing from the variable display effect. On the other hand, the setting suggestion in a mode different from the setting suggestion shown in FIGS. 8-18 (for example, the ending image of the big hit) is given at a timing different from the effect during variable display (for example, after the end of the big hit). It may be feasible.

In Example 1 of the feature unit 103SG of the above-described embodiment, an embodiment in which the effect during variable display can be executed only once during one variable display is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. The effect during variable display may be executed a plurality of times during the variable display of.

For example, as shown in FIG. 8-21 (A) as the second embodiment, the first period from the start timing of the variable display to the start timing of the reach effect of the normal reach for the fluctuation patterns of the normal reach and the super reach. And in the second period after the first period, the variable display effect can be executed.

Since the variable display time is short for the non-reach and small hit fluctuation patterns to execute the variable display effect twice or more, in the second embodiment, the variable display effect is executed as the normal reach and super reach variation patterns. Although it is limited to, non-reach and small hit fluctuation patterns may be included as execution targets of the effect during variable display.

Further, in the second embodiment, in the above-described variable display effect determination process, the presence or absence of the variable display effect execution determination table is used according to the variation pattern using the variable display effect execution determination table shown in FIG. 8-21 (B). Determined at different rates. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-21 (B), when the fluctuation pattern is normal reach, 40 out of 100 random numbers for determining the effect during variable display are displayed in the variable display effect execution decision table. Is assigned to the execution of the variable display effect, and 60 are assigned to the non-execution of the variable display effect. When the fluctuation pattern is super reach, 60 out of 100 random numbers for determining the execution of the variable display effect are assigned to the execution of the variable display effect in the variable display effect execution decision table. Individuals are assigned to non-execution of the effect during variable display.

When the execution of the variable display effect is determined in the second embodiment, the variable display effect is executed in both the first period and the second period shown in FIG. 8-21 (A).

If it is decided to execute the variable display effect when the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach, it is executed in the first period as shown in FIGS. 8-22 (A) and 8-22 (B). The execution of the setting suggestion and the reach notice is determined at different ratios between the variable display effect to be performed and the variable display effect to be executed in the second period. In the same period, the execution ratios of the setting suggestion and the reach notice are set to be the same regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8-23, when the execution of the variable display effect is determined when the fluctuation pattern is normal reach, the effect type (effect) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period. The pattern) is determined to be either pattern PT-1 to PT-7 (setting suggestion (low) or setting suggestion (high)) at a rate of 60% regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. , 40% to determine pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 (expected (low) or expected (high)). Further, as shown in FIG. 8-24, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is patterned at a rate of 40% regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Determined to be either PT-1 to PT-7 (setting suggestion (low) or setting suggestion (high)), and at a rate of 60%, pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 (expectation (low) or expectation). (High)) is decided.

Here, as shown in FIGS. 8-23 and 8-24, paying attention to the case where the fluctuation pattern is normal reach, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the first period The effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed is determined to be one of patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 59%, and pattern PT- at a rate of 1%. Any of 5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} was decided at a rate of 35%, and pattern PT-9 {reach was decided at a rate of 5%. Notice (high)} will be decided. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 38%, and 2%. The ratio of pattern PT-5 to PT-7 was determined to be {setting suggestion (high)}, the ratio was determined to be pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)}, and the ratio was 5%. The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided.

When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to 58.8% of the patterns PT-1 to PT. Determined to be any {setting suggestion (low)} of -4, and determined to be any {setting suggestion (high)} of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 at a rate of 1.2%, and at a rate of 35%. The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 5%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 37.8%. At a rate of 2.2%, one of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 was decided as {setting suggestion (high)}, and at a rate of 55%, it was decided on pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)}, and 5 The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined at a rate of%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to 58.5% of the patterns PT-1 to PT. Determined to be any {setting suggestion (low)} of -4, and determined to be any {setting suggestion (high)} of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 at a rate of 1.5%, and at a rate of 35%. The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 5%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 37.5%. At a rate of 2.5%, one of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 was decided as {setting suggestion (high)}, and at a rate of 55%, it was decided as pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)}, and 5 The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined at a rate of%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to the pattern PT-1 to PT-4 at a rate of 58%. Any one of {setting suggestion (low)} was decided, and one of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 was decided at a rate of 2% {setting suggestion (high)}, and pattern PT-8 was decided at a rate of 35%. The {reach notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 5%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 37%, and is 3%. The ratio of pattern PT-5 to PT-7 was determined to be {setting suggestion (high)}, the ratio was determined to be pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)}, and the ratio was 5%. The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 5, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to the pattern PT-1 to PT at a rate of 56.5%. Determined to be any {setting suggestion (low)} of -4, and determined to be any {setting suggestion (high)} of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 at a rate of 3.5%, and at a rate of 35%. The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 5%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 35.5%. One of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a rate of 4.5%, and pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} was decided at a rate of 55%, and 5 The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined at a rate of%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to the pattern PT-1 to PT-4 at a rate of 55%. Any one of {setting suggestion (low)} was decided, and one of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 was decided at a rate of 5% {setting suggestion (high)}, and pattern PT-8 was decided at a rate of 35%. The {reach notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 5%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 34%, and is 6%. The ratio of pattern PT-5 to PT-7 was determined to be {setting suggestion (high)}, the ratio was determined to be pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)}, and the ratio was 5%. The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-25 and 8-26, paying attention to the case where the fluctuation pattern is super reach, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, it is executed in the first period. The effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display is determined to be one of patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 59%, and pattern PT-5 at a rate of 1%. ~ PT-7 is decided as {setting suggestion (high)}, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is decided at a rate of 15%, and pattern PT-9 {reach notice is decided at a rate of 25%. (High)} is decided. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 38%, and 2%. The ratio was determined to be one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)}, the ratio was determined to be the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)}, and the ratio was 55%. The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to 58.8% of the patterns PT-1 to PT. Determined to be any {setting suggestion (low)} of -4, and determined to be any {setting suggestion (high)} of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 at a rate of 1.2%, and at a rate of 15%. The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 25%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 37.8%. At a rate of 2.2%, one of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 was decided as {setting suggestion (high)}, and at a rate of 5%, it was decided on pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)}, 55. The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined at a rate of%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to 58.5% of the patterns PT-1 to PT. Determined to be any {setting suggestion (low)} of -4, and determined to be any {setting suggestion (high)} of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 at a rate of 1.5%, and at a rate of 15%. The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 25%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 37.5%. One of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a rate of 2.5%, and pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} was decided at a rate of 5%, 55 The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined at a rate of%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to the pattern PT-1 to PT-4 at a rate of 58%. It was decided to be one of {setting suggestion (low)}, and it was decided to be any of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 2%, and pattern PT-8 at a rate of 15%. The {reach notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 25%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 37%, and is 3%. The ratio of pattern PT-5 to PT-7 was determined to be {setting suggestion (high)}, the ratio was determined to be pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)}, and the ratio was 55%. The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 5, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to the pattern PT-1 to PT at a rate of 56.5%. Determined to be any {setting suggestion (low)} of -4, and determined to be any {setting suggestion (high)} of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 at a rate of 3.5%, and at a rate of 15%. The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 25%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 35.5%. One of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a rate of 4.5%, and pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} was decided at a rate of 5%, 55 The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined at a rate of%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to the pattern PT-1 to PT-4 at a rate of 55%. It was decided to be one of {setting suggestion (low)}, and it was decided to be any of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 5%, and pattern PT-8 at a rate of 15%. The {reach notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 25%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 34%, and is 6%. The ratio of pattern PT-5 to PT-7 was determined to be {setting suggestion (high)}, the ratio was determined to be pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)}, and the ratio was 55%. The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided.

As described above, in the second embodiment, when the execution of the variable display effect is decided, the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 {reach is used as the effect type of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period. The rate (60%) at which the execution of the notice (low) or reach notice (high)} is determined is the pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 {reach] as the effect type of the variable display during the first period. It is set higher than the rate (40%) at which the execution of the notice (low) or reach notice (high)} is decided.

Therefore, as the effect during variable display is repeatedly executed, the reach notice that becomes the advantageous state suggestion result becomes easier to be executed, so that one game result, that is, a timing close to the timing at which the variable display result of the variable display is derived. Expectations for big hits can be increased.

In particular, as shown in FIGS. 8-23 to 8-26, regarding the effect type of the effect during variable display executed in the first period, any one of patterns PT-1 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (low)). Or, while the rate at which the setting suggestion (high)} is determined is set higher than the rate at which the execution of pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 {reach notice (low) or reach notice (high)} is determined. As for the effect type of the variable display effect that is executed in the second period, the rate at which the execution of pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 {reach notice (low) or reach notice (high)} is determined is the pattern. Any of PT-1 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (low) or setting suggestion (high)} is set higher than the determined ratio.

That is, the patterns PT-8 and the pattern PT-9 corresponding to the reach notice are determined at a higher rate in the second period than in the first period, and the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 corresponding to the setting suggestion are the second. By determining the period at a lower rate than the first period, the setting suggestion is executed at a higher rate than the reach notice in the first period, and the reach notice is executed at a higher rate than the reach notice in the second period. ..

Therefore, for example, after the reach notice (high) is executed as the variable display effect in the first period, the reach notice (low) is executed as the variable display effect in the second period, that is, the variable display is in progress. The variable display is caused by the fact that the reach notice is executed so that the expectation of the reach notice decreases as the effect is repeatedly executed (so-called downfall), or the reach notice (high) is executed in the first time. By allowing the player to predict that is likely to be super reach before the reach notice is executed twice, the player's expectation that the variable display is super reach is reduced. It is possible to prevent it from being stored.

Further, in the second embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-23 to 8-26, the variable display effect performed in the second period is more effective than the variable display effect executed in the first period. However, the rate at which any of patterns PT-5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined as the effect type is set high. That is, as the variable display effect is executed, the variable display effect is more likely to be executed in the pattern PT-9, so that the game against the variable display effect being executed in the patterns PT-5 to PT-8. The expectation of the person can be maintained.

In the second embodiment, when it is decided to execute the variable display effect, the variable display effect is executed twice in the first period and the second period, but the present invention illustrates this. When it is decided to execute the variable display effect, the variable display effect may be executed three or more times. When the variable display effect is executed three or more times in this way, the effect type determination ratio is set so that the pattern PT-9 can be easily determined each time the variable display effect is executed. It may be possible to maintain the expectation of the engineer for a longer period of time.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-23 to 8-26, the variable display effect performed in the first period and the variable display effect executed in the second period have the pattern PT- as an effect type. Since the ratios of 1 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (low) or setting suggestion (high)} are different, the variable display effect executed in the first period and the variable display effect executed in the second period are executed. It is difficult to continuously execute setting suggestions with the effect during variable display. That is, in both of these two variable display effects, it is possible to prevent the game enjoyment from being lowered due to the variable display effect becoming monotonous due to the execution of the setting suggestion.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-23 to 8-26, the variable display effect performed in the first period and the variable display effect executed in the second period have the pattern PT- as an effect type. Since the ratio of 8 and PT-9 {reach notice (low) or reach notice (high)} is different, it is executed in the variable display in-stage effect executed in the first period and in the second period. It is difficult for the reach notice to be executed continuously with the effect during variable display. That is, in both of these two variable display effects, it is possible to prevent the game enjoyment from being lowered due to the variable display effect becoming monotonous due to the execution of the reach notice.

Further, in the second embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-23 to 8-26, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the first period and the variable display effect in the second period. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect control CPU 120 is used in the first period, although the mode in which the reach notice is executed is different from the case of executing the variable display. The rate at which the reach notice is executed as the variable display effect may be the same between the case where the variable display effect is executed and the case where the variable display effect is executed in the second period. By doing so, when the variable display effect is executed in the first period and the second period, the reach notice is executed as the variable display effect, and the first period and the second period You can expect the player in the same way.

In the second embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-23 to 8-26, if the variable display advance notice effect is executed during the same period, regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Although the embodiment in which the execution of the reach notice is determined is the same as the variable display notice effect, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display notice effect executed in the same period is not limited to this. , The ratio at which the execution of the reach notice is determined as the effect during variable display may differ depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. By doing so, the rate at which the reach notice is executed as the variable display effect in the first period or the second period changes according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, so that the variable display It is possible to prevent the medium production from becoming monotonous.

Further, in the second embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-22 to 8-26, focusing on the effect during variable display executed in the first period, the ratio (pattern PT-1 to 1) that determines the execution of the setting suggestion. The ratio for determining the execution of any of the patterns PT-7) is set to 60%, which is the same ratio regardless of the set value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the ratio for determining the reach notice (pattern). The ratio for determining the execution of the PT-8 or the pattern PT9) is set to 40%, which is the same ratio regardless of the set value set for the pachinko gaming machine. Similarly, focusing on the variable display effect to be executed in the second period, the ratio of determining the execution of the setting suggestion (the ratio of determining the execution of any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7) is the pachinko gaming machine 1. Regardless of the set value, it is set to 40%, which is the same ratio, and the ratio for determining the reach notice (the ratio for determining the execution of pattern PT-8 or pattern PT9) is set for the pachinko gaming machine. It is set to 60%, which is the same ratio regardless of the set value.

Therefore, even if the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 1 to 6, the variable display effect (the first variable display effect) executed in the first period is always performed. The setting suggestion is executed at a rate of 60%, the reach notice is executed at a rate of 40%, and the variable display during the second period (the second variable display during the effect) is always set at a rate of 40%. Since the suggestion is executed and the reach notice is executed at a rate of 60%, the player can be expected to execute the setting suggestion in the same way.

Further, in the second embodiment, since the effect during variable display can be executed a plurality of times in one variable display, the chances of providing reach notice and setting suggestion in one variable display increase, so that the interest is improved. ..

More specifically, when only the reach notice can be executed independently in relation to the display result of one variable display, the setting suggestion is performed at a timing other than the variable display (for example, the ending or variable display of the jackpot game state). It is possible to execute it independently (when it is not executed), but when the player is playing a game, the most noticeable thing is during the execution period of the variable display. Therefore, in the variable display in-process effect in which both the reach notice and the setting suggestion can be executed, not only the setting suggestion can be executed during the execution period of the variable display that the player pays most attention to, but also the setting suggestion can be executed in the second embodiment. As described above, by making it possible to execute the variable display effect multiple times in one variable display, not only can the chance of executing the setting suggestion be increased, but also the second period in the first period as described above. If it is executed at a higher rate, it is possible to execute the setting suggestion and the reach notice in a well-balanced manner without hindering the execution of the reach notice even in the fluctuation pattern of the jackpot.

Further, in the second embodiment, when it is decided to execute the effect during variable display, either the reach notice or the setting suggestion is executed in both the first period and the second period. The invention is not limited to this, and in at least one of the first period and the second period, a non-execution may be determined in which neither the reach notice nor the setting suggestion is executed.

When it is possible to determine non-execution in this way, even if the execution rate of the setting suggestion is set to be the same in the first period and the second period, if the execution rate of the reach notice is different between the first period and the second period. Can be made. Further, even if the execution rate of the reach notice is set to be the same in the first period and the second period, the execution rate of the setting suggestion can be made different between the first period and the second period.

(Second invention)
As described above, the present embodiment includes the second invention shown below. That is, conventionally, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, the variable display result becomes a big hit by changing the set value, for example, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. There were some that could change the probability of becoming (the probability of being controlled in an advantageous state). In the game machine described in the above patent gazette, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a set value depending on the type of animal displayed. When either of the setting suggestion effects can be executed, no consideration is given to which effect is prioritized, and the setting suggestion effect to be set as the set value when controlled in an advantageous state is executed. Then, there was a problem that the production became inappropriate. Therefore, for the purpose of providing a game machine that can prevent the production from becoming inappropriate,
The gaming machine of means 1 of the second invention is
It can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and is set to one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 6) having different advantages for the player. A possible gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1)
A predetermined effect executing means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 has one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 as the effect during variable display) capable of executing the predetermined effect by any of the plurality of types of effect modes. It is equipped with a setting suggestion based on, or a part where reach notice based on patterns PT-8 and PT-9 can be executed).
The effect mode of the predetermined effect is a special mode (for example, a reach notice based on the special pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9) that suggests that the predetermined effect is controlled, and a suggestion regarding the setting. Includes specific aspects (eg, setting suggestions based on any of the specific patterns PT-1 to PT-7).
When the predetermined effect executing means can execute both the predetermined effect of the special aspect and the predetermined effect of the specific aspect when the predetermined effect is executed a plurality of times (for example, FIG. 8-21 as Example 2). As shown, during the variable display of normal reach and super reach), in the second number of times after the first number of times, than when the predetermined effect is executed in the first number of times. It is possible to execute the predetermined effect of the special aspect at a higher rate when the predetermined effect is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-22 as the second embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 is in the first period. Reach based on the special pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 when the variable display effect is executed in the second period after the first period than when the variable display effect is executed. The part that executes the notice at a high rate)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, as the predetermined effect is repeatedly executed, the predetermined effect of the special aspect is easily executed, so that the expectation for the advantageous state can be increased at a timing close to one game result.
More specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-22, the variable display effect executed in the second period is easier to execute the reach notice than the variable display effect executed in the first period. It is possible to increase the expectation that the jackpot game state will be controlled during the second period, which is closer to the timing when the variable display ends than the first period.

The gaming machine of means 2 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to means 1.
When the predetermined effect is executed in the second number of times, the predetermined effect executing means can execute the predetermined effect of the specific aspect at a rate lower than the ratio of executing the predetermined effect of the specific aspect in the first number of times. (For example, as shown in FIG. 8-22 as the second embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 performs the variable display during the effect in the first period in the second period after the first period. The part where the setting suggestion based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7, which is a specific pattern, is executed at a lower rate when the effect during variable display is executed)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to suppress a decrease in expectation for an advantageous state because a predetermined effect of a specific mode is easily executed at a timing close to one game result.
Specifically, even if it is not possible to determine non-execution as a variable display effect, it is possible to determine the reach notice at a higher rate in the second period than in the first period.

The gaming machine of the means 3 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to the means 1 or 2.
The predetermined effect executing means is
When the predetermined effect is executed in the first number of times, the predetermined effect of the specific aspect can be executed at a higher rate than the predetermined effect of the special aspect (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-22 as Example 2). In addition, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in the first period, the setting suggestion based on any of the specific patterns PT-1 to PT-7 is a special pattern pattern PT-. 8 or the part to be executed at a higher rate than the reach notice based on pattern PT-9),
When the predetermined effect is executed in the second number of times, the predetermined effect of the special aspect can be executed at a higher rate than the predetermined effect of the specific aspect (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-22 as Example 2). In addition, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the second period, the reach notice based on the special pattern pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 is given as the specific pattern pattern PT-1 to 1. The part to be executed at a higher rate than the setting suggestion based on any of PT-7)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, as the predetermined effect is repeatedly executed, it becomes easier to execute the predetermined effect of the special mode, but it becomes difficult to execute the predetermined effect of the specific mode. Therefore, the advantageous state is set at a timing close to one game result. Expectations can be suitably increased.

The gaming machine of means 4 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3.
The gaming machine is capable of variable display (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes variable display of a special symbol by executing a special symbol variation process as shown in FIG. 5, and effect control as shown in FIG. 7. The part that executes the variable display of the decorative pattern by executing the effect processing during the variable display of the CPU 120),
The predetermined effect executing means can execute the predetermined effect a plurality of times in one variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-21 as the second embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 is more than the start of the normal reach effect. The part where the effect can be executed during variable display in the first period and the second period, which are the previous periods)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, there are more opportunities to provide a predetermined effect of a special mode or a specific mode in one variable display, so that the interest is improved.

In the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-21, a mode in which the variable display effect can be executed in the first period and the second period before the start of the reach effect is illustrated. The present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display effect may be executed even during the reach effect.

The gaming machine of means 5 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 4.
The gaming machine is capable of variable display (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes variable display of a special symbol by executing a special symbol variation process as shown in FIG. 5, and effect control as shown in FIG. 7. The part that executes the variable display of the decorative pattern by executing the effect processing during the variable display of the CPU 120),
The predetermined effect executing means can execute the predetermined effect a plurality of times over a plurality of variable displays (for example, the effect control CPU 120 has a variable display (target variation) based on the hold memory that is the target of the look-ahead notice. The part that executes reach notice or setting suggestion as a look-ahead notice for target fluctuation over multiple variable displays until the start)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since it is possible to execute a predetermined effect of a special mode or a predetermined effect of a specific mode before the variable display that results in one game is started, the interest is improved.

The gaming machine of means 6 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 5.
The predetermined effect executing means can execute a predetermined effect of a special mode which is a suggestion of being controlled to the advantageous state and also a suggestion of setting (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can perform a reach notice and a setting suggestion). When both are feasible, the paraglider in which the character appears moves when displaying a specific image (for example, paraglider image Z1) that suggests both a jackpot and a maximum setting (setting value 6). Image etc.) Display part)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to effectively increase the player's expectation that the predetermined effect of the special mode or the special mode different from the specific mode is executed, so that the game interest can be improved.

(Third invention)
As described above, the present embodiment includes the following third invention. That is, conventionally, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, the variable display result becomes a big hit by changing the set value, for example, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. There were some that could change the probability of becoming (the probability of being controlled in an advantageous state). In the gaming machine described in the above patent gazette, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a setting value depending on the type of animal displayed. For example, when such a setting suggestion effect can be repeatedly executed a plurality of times. , There is a problem that the production may be inappropriate because no consideration is given to how to execute the setting suggestion effect in the first and second times of the multiple times. .. Therefore, for the purpose of providing a game machine that can prevent the production from becoming inappropriate,
The gaming machine of means 1 of the third invention is
It can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and is set to one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 6) having different advantages for the player. A possible gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1)
A predetermined effect executing means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 can execute an effect during variable display) capable of executing a predetermined effect by any one of a plurality of types of effect modes is provided.
The production mode of the predetermined effect includes a first suggestion mode (for example, a setting suggestion (low) based on patterns PT-1 to PT-4) that suggests the setting, and a setting and a type suggested by the first suggestion mode. Includes a second suggestion embodiment (eg, setting suggestion (high) based on pattern PT-5-5 to pattern PT-7) that makes suggestions for different settings.
When the predetermined effect executing means can execute both the predetermined effect of the first suggestion mode and the predetermined effect of the second suggestion mode when the predetermined effect is executed a plurality of times (for example, FIG. 2 as a second embodiment). As shown in 8-21, during the variable display of the normal reach and the super reach), the predetermined effect is executed in the first number of the plurality of times, and after the first number of the plurality of times. It is possible to execute the predetermined effect of the second suggestion mode at a higher rate when the predetermined effect is executed in the second number of times (for example, FIGS. 8-23 to 8-26 and 8 to 28 to 8). As shown in −31, when the effect control CPU 120 can execute the variable display effect in the first period and the second period during the variable display of the normal reach and the super reach as the second and third embodiments, The part where the setting suggestion (strong) is executed at a higher rate when the variable display effect is executed in the second period than when the variable display effect is executed in the first period)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, as the predetermined effect of the second suggestion mode is repeatedly executed, the predetermined effect of the second suggestion mode is easily executed, so that the player's expectation that the predetermined effect of the second suggestion mode is executed is maintained. Can be done.
More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8-23 to 8-26, the variable display effect executed during the second period suggests a setting (stronger) than the variable display effect executed during the first period. Is easy to execute, so that the player's expectation that the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a high set value such as 4 to 6 can be maintained.

In the second embodiment, the setting suggestion (low) based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4, which is the first suggestion mode for suggesting the setting, suggests an odd number setting or an even number setting, and the first suggestion. The setting suggestion (high) based on any of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7, which is the second suggestion mode in which the setting suggested in the mode and the setting of a different type are suggested, is a form suggesting an intermediate setting or higher or the highest setting. Although exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the second suggestion mode may be any one as long as it suggests a setting different from the setting suggested in the first suggestion mode, for example, the first suggestion. The set value suggested in the embodiment and the set value suggested in the second suggested embodiment may all be different set values (for example, the first suggested embodiment suggests the set value 1 and the second suggested embodiment is set). When the value 6 is suggested, or when the first suggestion mode suggests odd setting values 1, 3, 5 and the second suggestion mode suggests even setting 2, 4, 6), the first suggestion mode suggests. A common setting value may be included in both the setting value to be set and the setting value suggested in the second suggestion mode (for example, the first suggestion mode suggests the setting values 1 to 4 and the second suggestion mode is Even if one of the first suggestion mode and the second suggestion mode is a suggestion about a setting change and the other is a suggestion about a set value that is set. Good. That is, not only the setting values suggested by the first suggestion mode and the second suggestion mode are different, but also the setting to be suggested when there are a plurality of setting values suggested by the first suggestion mode and the second suggestion mode. Includes those with different numbers and ranges of values, or those with different suggestions.

The gaming machine of means 2 of the third invention is the gaming machine according to means 1.
The predetermined effect executing means is specified including the first suggestion mode and the second suggestion mode when the predetermined effect is executed in the first number of times and when the predetermined effect is executed in the second number of times. The predetermined effect of the embodiment can be executed at the same ratio (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-27 as the third embodiment, the case where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect during the first period and the case where the effect is executed. The part where the setting suggestion based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 is executed at the same ratio in the case where the variable display effect is executed in the second period after the first period)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, regardless of whether the predetermined effect of the specific mode is executed at the first time or the second number of times, the execution of the predetermined effect of the specific mode can be expected in the same manner.
Specifically, after setting the execution rate of the entire setting suggestion to be the same (or a lower rate in the second period than in the first period) in the first period and the second period, the effect during variable display in the first period By executing the setting suggestion (strong) at a higher rate when executing the variable display effect in the second period than when executing, it is possible to avoid excessive execution of the setting suggestion. At the same time, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the high set value.

The gaming machine of the means 3 of the third invention is the gaming machine according to the means 1 or 2.
The predetermined effect executing means is
It is possible to execute a predetermined effect of a special aspect (for example, a reach notice based on the special pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9) that suggests that the advantageous state is controlled.
When the predetermined effect is executed in the second number of times, the predetermined effect of the special aspect can be executed at a higher rate than the ratio of executing the predetermined effect of the special aspect in the first number of times (for example, Example 2). As shown in FIG. 8-22, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the second period after the first period, as compared with the case where the variable display effect is executed in the first period. The part where the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9, which is a special pattern, is executed at a higher rate)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, as the predetermined effect is repeatedly executed, the ratio of the predetermined effect of the special aspect being executed increases, so that the expectation for the advantageous state can be increased at a timing close to one game result.
In Example 2, if the execution rate of the entire setting suggestion is the same in the first period and the second period, the setting suggestion (strong) can be executed at a higher rate in the second period than in the first period. However, the reach notice can be executed at a higher rate in the second period than in the first period.

The gaming machine of means 4 of the third invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3.
The gaming machine is capable of variable display (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes variable display of a special symbol by executing a special symbol variation process as shown in FIG. 5, and effect control as shown in FIG. 7. The part that executes the variable display of the decorative pattern by executing the effect processing during the variable display of the CPU 120),
The predetermined effect executing means can execute the predetermined effect a plurality of times in one variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-21 as the second embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 is more than the start of the normal reach effect. The part where the effect can be executed during variable display in the first period and the second period, which are the previous periods)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, there are more opportunities to provide a predetermined effect of a special mode or a specific mode in one variable display, so that the interest is improved.

The gaming machine of means 5 of the third invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 4.
The gaming machine is capable of variable display (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes variable display of a special symbol by executing a special symbol variation process as shown in FIG. 5, and effect control as shown in FIG. 7. The part that executes the variable display of the decorative pattern by executing the effect processing during the variable display of the CPU 120),
The predetermined effect executing means can execute the predetermined effect a plurality of times over a plurality of variable displays (for example, the effect control CPU 120 has a variable display (target variation) based on the hold memory that is the target of the look-ahead notice. The part that executes reach notice or setting suggestion as a look-ahead notice for target fluctuation over multiple variable displays until the start)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since it is possible to execute a predetermined effect of a special mode or a predetermined effect of a specific mode before the variable display that results in one game is started, the interest is improved.

The gaming machine of means 6 of the third invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 5.
The predetermined effect executing means can execute a predetermined effect of a special mode which is a suggestion of being controlled to the advantageous state and also a suggestion of setting (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can perform a reach notice and a setting suggestion). When both are feasible, the paraglider in which the character appears moves when displaying a specific image (for example, paraglider image Z1) that suggests both a jackpot and a maximum setting (setting value 6). Image etc.) Display part)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to effectively increase the player's expectation that the predetermined effect of the special mode or the special mode different from the specific mode is executed, so that the game interest can be improved.

(Fourth Invention)
As described above, the present embodiment includes the fourth invention shown below. That is, conventionally, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, the variable display result becomes a big hit by changing the set value, for example, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. There were some that could change the probability of becoming (the probability of being controlled in an advantageous state). In the gaming machine described in the above patent gazette, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a setting value depending on the type of animal displayed. For example, when such a setting suggestion effect can be repeatedly executed a plurality of times. , There is a problem that the production may be inappropriate because no consideration is given to how to execute the setting suggestion effect in the first and second times of the multiple times. .. Therefore, for the purpose of providing a game machine that can prevent the production from becoming inappropriate,
The gaming machine of means 1 of the fourth invention is
It can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and is set to one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 6) having different advantages for the player. A possible gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1)
A predetermined effect executing means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can perform a predetermined effect according to any one of a plurality of types of effect modes) as an effect during variable display, in any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7. It has a setting suggestion based on it, or a part that can execute reach notice based on patterns PT-8 and PT-9).
The effect mode of the predetermined effect is a special mode (for example, a reach notice based on the special pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9) that suggests that the predetermined effect is controlled, and a suggestion regarding the setting. Includes specific aspects (eg, setting suggestions based on any of the specific patterns PT-1 to PT-7).
The predetermined effect executing means is
The predetermined effect can be executed a plurality of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-21 as the second embodiment, the variable display effect can be executed in the first period and the second period before the reach effect is started. part),
The predetermined effect of the specific aspect is performed when the predetermined effect is executed in the first number of the plurality of times and when the predetermined effect is executed in the second number of times after the first number of the plurality of times. It can be executed at different ratios (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-22 as Example 2, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display during effect in the first period and after the first period. The ratio of executing the setting suggestion based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 differs between the case of executing the variable display effect in the second period of
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the easiness of appearance of the predetermined effect of the specific mode differs between the first and second times, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-22, in the first period, the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution of the setting suggestion as the variable display effect at a higher rate than the execution of the reach notice, while the second period. In, by determining the execution of the setting suggestion as the variable display effect at a lower rate than the execution of the reach notice, not only is it difficult to execute the setting suggestion in the second period, which is a timing close to the variable display result, but also Since the reach notice is easily executed, the player's expectation for the big hit can be increased. In the first period, the execution of the setting suggestion may be determined at a lower rate than the execution of the reach notice, while in the second period, the execution of the setting suggestion may be determined at a higher rate than the execution of the reach notice. ..

The gaming machine of means 2 of the fourth invention is the gaming machine according to means 1.
The predetermined effect executing means can execute the predetermined effect of the special aspect at the same ratio when the predetermined effect is executed in the first number of times and when the predetermined effect is executed in the second number of times. For example, in the case where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the first period and the case where the variable display effect is executed in the second period after the first period, the pattern PT-8 Or the part that executes the reach notice based on the pattern PT-9 at the same rate)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, regardless of whether the predetermined effect of the special aspect is executed at the first time or the second number of times, the execution of the predetermined effect of the special aspect can be similarly expected.
In Example 2, if the non-execution can be determined, the execution ratio of the reach notice can be made the same while the execution ratio of the setting suggestion is different between the first period and the second period.

The gaming machine of the means 3 of the fourth invention is the gaming machine according to the means 1.
The predetermined effect executing means can execute the predetermined effect of the special aspect at different ratios when the predetermined effect is executed in the first number of times and when the predetermined effect is executed in the second number of times (for example). As shown in FIG. 8-22 as the second embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 is performing the variable display during the first period and during the variable display in the second period after the first period. The part where the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 is executed at the same ratio in the case of executing the production)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the appearance status of the predetermined effect of the special aspect changes depending on the first number of times and the second number of times, it is possible to suppress the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.
Specifically, in the first period, the execution of the setting suggestion is determined at a higher rate than the execution of the reach notice, while in the second period, the execution of the setting suggestion is determined at a lower rate than the execution of the reach notice. In the second period, which is close to the variable display result, not only is it difficult to execute the setting suggestion, but also the reach notice is easily executed, so that the player's expectation for the big hit can be increased.

The gaming machine of means 4 of the fourth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3.
When the predetermined effect execution means executes the predetermined effect at the predetermined number of times among the plurality of times, the first set value is set among the plurality of set values, and the first set value is different from the first set value. The predetermined effect of the special aspect can be executed at the same ratio as when the two set values are set (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-22 as the second embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 is the first. When executing the effect during variable display during the period, the part that executes the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 at the same ratio regardless of the set value, and the effect control CPU 120 When executing the variable display effect in the second period, the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 is executed at the same ratio regardless of the set value)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the appearance state of the predetermined effect of the special mode does not change regardless of the set value at the predetermined number of times, the same can be expected for the execution of the predetermined effect of the special mode.

The gaming machine of means 5 of the fourth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3.
When the predetermined effect execution means executes the predetermined effect at the predetermined number of times among the plurality of times, the second set value is different from the case where the first set value is set among the plurality of set values. It is possible to execute the predetermined effect of the special mode at a different ratio than when the set value is set (for example, it is set when the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect during the first period. Set when the part that executes the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 at different ratios according to the set value and when the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the second period. The part that executes the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 at different rates depending on the set value)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the appearance status of the predetermined effect of the special mode at the predetermined number of times changes according to the set value, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.

(Fifth invention)
As described above, the present embodiment includes the fifth invention shown below. That is, conventionally, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, the variable display result becomes a big hit by changing the set value, for example, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. There were some that could change the probability of becoming (the probability of being controlled in an advantageous state). In the gaming machine described in the above patent gazette, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a setting value depending on the type of animal displayed. For example, when such a setting suggestion effect can be repeatedly executed a plurality of times. , There is a problem that the production may be inappropriate because no consideration is given to how to execute the setting suggestion effect in the first and second times of the multiple times. .. Therefore, for the purpose of providing a game machine that can prevent the production from becoming inappropriate,
The gaming machine of means 1 of the fifth invention is
It can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and is set to one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 6) having different advantages for the player. A possible gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1)
A predetermined effect executing means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can perform a predetermined effect according to any one of a plurality of types of effect modes) as an effect during variable display, in any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7. It has a setting suggestion based on it, or a part that can execute reach notice based on patterns PT-8 and PT-9).
The effect mode of the predetermined effect is a special mode (for example, a reach notice based on the special pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9) that suggests that the predetermined effect is controlled, and a suggestion regarding the setting. Includes specific aspects (eg, setting suggestions based on any of the specific patterns PT-1 to PT-7).
The predetermined effect executing means is
The predetermined effect can be executed a plurality of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-21 as the second embodiment, the variable display effect can be executed in the first period and the second period before the reach effect is started. part),
A plurality of times when the first set value is set among the plurality of set values and when the second set value different from the first set value is set among the plurality of set values. Of these, the predetermined effect of the specific aspect can be executed at the same ratio in the predetermined number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-22 as the second embodiment, the pachinko game is performed for the variable display effect to be executed in the first period. The setting suggestion is executed at a rate of 60% regardless of the set value set in the machine 1, and the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is set regardless of the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1. The part where the suggestion is executed at a rate of 40%)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, regardless of whether the first set value or the second set value is set, the appearance status of the predetermined effect of the specific mode does not change at the predetermined number of times, so that the predetermined effect of the specific mode can be executed. On the other hand, we can expect the same.
Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8-22 to 8-26, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed in the first period regardless of which of the values 1 to 6 is set as the set value. The rate at which the setting suggestion is executed as the variable display effect (appearance status) and the rate at which the setting suggestion is executed as the variable display effect during the second period (appearance status) are the same, that is, the set value is Since the appearance status of the setting suggestion is the same regardless of whether the low setting value or the high setting value is set, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the setting value depending on the appearance status of the setting suggestion.

In the second embodiment, even if any of 1 to 6 is set as the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the setting suggestion is executed as the variable display effect executed in the first period. Although the mode in which the ratio (appearance status) is not different from the ratio (appearance status) in which the setting suggestion is executed as the variable display effect executed in the second period is illustrated, the present invention is limited to this. Rather, the ratio (appearance status) of setting suggestion as a variable display effect executed in the first period for at least two setting values (for example, 1 and 2) out of a plurality of setting values 1 to 6. If the ratio (appearance status) of the setting suggestion being executed as the variable display effect executed in the second period is the same, the setting values (for example, 3 to 6) other than the above two setting values are the second. The rate at which the setting suggestion is executed (appearance status) may not be the same in the first period and the second period.

Furthermore, only in the variable display effect of either the variable display effect executed in the first period or the variable display effect executed in the second period, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has 1 to 6 set values. Regardless of which value is set, the rate at which the setting suggestion is executed as the variable display effect executed in the first period (appearance status) and the variable display effect executed in the second period The rate at which the setting suggestion is executed (appearance status) may not be different.

The gaming machine of means 2 of the fifth invention is the gaming machine according to means 1.
The predetermined effect executing means is the special effect when the predetermined effect is executed in the first number of times out of a plurality of times and when the predetermined effect is executed in the second number of times after the first number of times. The predetermined effect of the aspect can be executed at the same ratio (for example, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the first period and the variable display effect in the second period). Then, the part that executes the reach notice based on the patterns PT-8 and PT-9 at the same rate)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, regardless of whether the predetermined effect of the special aspect is executed at the first time or the second number of times, the execution of the predetermined effect of the special aspect can be similarly expected.

The gaming machine of the means 3 of the fifth invention is the gaming machine according to the means 1.
The predetermined effect executing means is the special effect when the predetermined effect is executed in the first number of times out of a plurality of times and when the predetermined effect is executed in the second number of times after the first number of times. The predetermined effect of the embodiment can be executed at different ratios (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-22 as the second embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect during the first period and the first. The part where the reach notice based on the patterns PT-8 and PT-9 is executed at different rates depending on the case where the variable display effect is executed in the second period after the first period)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the appearance status of the predetermined effect of the special aspect changes depending on the first number of times and the second number of times, it is possible to suppress the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.

The gaming machine of means 4 of the fifth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3.
When the predetermined effect execution means executes the predetermined effect at the predetermined number of times among the plurality of times, the first set value among the plurality of set values is set and the first set value is different from the first set value. 2 It is possible to execute the predetermined effect of the special aspect at the same ratio as when the set value is set (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-22 as the second embodiment, the variable execution is performed in the first period. For the display effect, the reach notice is executed at a rate of 40% regardless of the set value set for the pachinko game machine 1, and the variable display effect to be executed during the second period is set for the pachinko game machine 1. The part that executes reach notice at a rate of 60% regardless of the set value)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the appearance state of the predetermined effect of the special mode does not change regardless of the set value at the predetermined number of times, the same can be expected for the execution of the predetermined effect of the special mode.
More specifically, since the appearance status of the reach notice is the same regardless of which of the set values 1 to 6 is set, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the set value depending on the appearance status of the reach notice.

The gaming machine of means 5 of the fifth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3.
When the predetermined effect execution means executes the predetermined effect at the predetermined number of times among the plurality of times, the second set value is different from the case where the first set value is set among the plurality of set values. It is possible to execute the predetermined effect of the special aspect at a different ratio than when the set value is set (for example, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect during the first period, it is set. It is set when the part that executes the reach notice based on the patterns PT-8 and PT-9 at different ratios according to the set value and when the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the second period. The part that executes the reach notice based on the patterns PT-8 and PT-9 at different rates according to the set value)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the appearance status of the predetermined effect of the special mode at the predetermined number of times changes according to the set value, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.

Further, in the second embodiment, the first period and the second period are set between the start timing of the variable display and the start timing of the reach effect of the normal reach, but the present invention is limited thereto. It is possible to set a period other than the above as long as it is a period from the start to the end of the variable display until the variable display result is displayed. For example, the first period is from the start to the end of normal reach, the second period is from the start to the end of super reach, the first period is from the start of normal reach or super reach, and the second period is normal reach. Or until the end of Super Reach, or by temporarily stopping the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol and then restarting the variable display, one variable display can be simulated multiple times. In the case of a pseudo-continuous fluctuation pattern accompanied by a pseudo-continuous effect that looks like the variable display of, the first period is set as the start timing of the first re-variable display, the second period is set as the start timing of the second re-variable display, and the like. , May correspond to the revariable display period.

In the second embodiment, the variable display effect can be executed twice during one variable display, and the same number of variable display effects can be reached regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. An example is shown in which the execution of the notice and the execution of the setting suggestion are determined at the same ratio. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIGS. 8-27 (A) and 8-27 (B) as Example 3, the effect during variable display is 2 during one variable display. When it is possible to execute the game once, the execution of the reach notice and the execution of the setting suggestion are determined at different ratios according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, even if the effect is being variablely displayed the same number of times. You may.

When it is decided to execute the variable display effect, the variable display effect and the second period to be executed in the first period are shown in FIGS. 8-27 (A) and 8-27 (B). It is decided to execute the setting suggestion and the reach notice at the same ratio for each of the variable display during production executed in.

Here, as shown in FIGS. 8-28 and 8-29, paying attention to the case where the fluctuation pattern is normal reach, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the first period The effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed is determined to be pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 64%, and pattern PT5 to pattern PT at a rate of 1%. Determined to be -8 {setting suggestion (high)}, determined to pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 30%, and to pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} at a rate of 5%. decide. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 63%, and a rate of 2%. Pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided, and pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} was decided at a rate of 30%, and pattern PT-9 {reach was decided at a rate of 5%. Notice (high)} will be decided.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to 58.8% of the patterns PT-1 to 1 pattern. Determined to be PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)}, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 1.2%, and pattern PT-8 {reach at a rate of 35%. The notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 5%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 57.8%. Pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a rate of 2%, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} was decided at a rate of 35%, and pattern PT was decided at a rate of 5%. -9 {Reach notice (high)} is decided.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to the pattern PT-1 to pattern at a rate of 53.5%. Determined to be PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)}, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 1.5%, and pattern PT-8 {reach at a rate of 40%. The notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 5%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 52.5%. Pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a rate of 5%, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} was decided at a rate of 40%, and pattern PT was decided at a rate of 5%. -9 {Reach notice (high)} is decided.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to pattern PT-1 to pattern PT- at a rate of 48%. 4 {Setting suggestion (low)} was decided, and pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a rate of 2%, and pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low) was decided at a rate of 45%. }, And the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 5%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a ratio of 47%, and a ratio of 3%. In, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided, and pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} was decided at a rate of 45%, and pattern PT-9 {reach was decided at a rate of 5%. Notice (high)} will be decided.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 5, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to the pattern PT-1 to pattern at a rate of 41.5%. Determined to be PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)}, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 3.5%, and pattern PT-8 {reach at a rate of 50%. The notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 5%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 41.5%. Pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a rate of 5%, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} was decided at a rate of 50%, and pattern PT was decided at a rate of 5%. -9 {Reach notice (high)} is decided.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to pattern PT-1 to pattern PT- at a rate of 35%. 4 {Setting suggestion (low)} was decided, and pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a rate of 5%, and pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low) was decided at a rate of 55%. }, And the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 5%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 34%, and a rate of 6%. Pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided, and pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} was decided at a rate of 55%, and pattern PT-9 {reach was decided at a rate of 5%. Notice (high)} will be decided.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-30 and 8-31, paying attention to the case where the fluctuation pattern is super reach, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the first period The effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed is determined to be one of pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 64%, and pattern PT5 at a rate of 1%. ~ Pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} was decided at a rate of 17.5%, and pattern PT was decided at a rate of 17.5%. -9 {Reach notice (high)} is decided. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 63%, and 2 Pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a rate of%, and pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} was decided at a rate of 5%, and a rate of 30% The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided.

When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to 58.8% of the patterns PT-1 to 1 pattern. Determined to be one of PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)}, determined to be one of pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 1.2%, and determined at a rate of 20%. The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 20%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 57.8%. 2. Determined to be one of pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 2.2%, and determined to pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 5%, 35 The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined at a rate of%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to the pattern PT-1 to pattern at a rate of 53.5%. Determined to be one of PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)}, and determined to be one of pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 1.5%, and 22.5%. The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined by the ratio, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined at the ratio of 22.5%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 52.5%. , Pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 2.5%, and pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 5%, 40 The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined at a rate of%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to pattern PT-1 to pattern PT- at a rate of 48%. 4 Determined to be one of {setting suggestion (low)}, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 at a rate of 2%, and pattern PT-8 at a rate of 25%. The {reach notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 25%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 47%, and 3 Pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a rate of%, and pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} was decided at a rate of 5%, and at a rate of 45%. The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 5, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to the pattern PT-1 to pattern at a rate of 41.5%. Determined to be one of PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)}, and determined to be one of pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 3.5%, 27.5% The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined by the ratio, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined at the ratio of 27.5%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 40.5%. , 4.5% of pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)}, 5% of pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)}, 50 The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined at a rate of%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to pattern PT-1 to pattern PT- at a rate of 35%. 4 Determined to be one of {setting suggestion (low)}, pattern PT5 to one of pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 5%, and pattern PT-8 at a rate of 30%. The {reach notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 30%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 34%, and 6 Pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a rate of%, and pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} was decided at a rate of 5%, and a rate of 55% The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided.

As described above, in the third embodiment, when it is decided to execute the effect during variable display, the first period is set regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 being any of 1 to 6. Patterns PT-1 to PT-7 {setting value suggestion (low) or setting suggestion (high)} are determined as the production type of the effect during variable display executed in The ratio at which the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 {set value suggestion (low) or setting suggestion (high)} is determined is set to be the same as the effect type of the medium effect. Therefore, regardless of whether the setting suggestion is executed in the first period or the second period, the player can expect the setting suggestion result in the same way.

Furthermore, the rate at which pattern PT-8 and pattern PT-9 {reach notice (low) and reach notice (high)} are determined as the production type of the variable display effect executed in the first period and in the second period The rate at which the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (low) or reach notice (high)} is determined is set to be the same as the effect type of the effect during variable display to be executed. Therefore, regardless of whether the reach notice is executed in the first period or the second period, the player can expect the advantageous state suggestion result in the same way.

On the other hand, when the variable display effect is executed in the first period or the second period, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the first set value (for example, the set value 1) and the second. The ratio of patterns PT-1 to PT-7 {set value suggestion (low) or set value suggestion (high)} is different between the set value (for example, set value 6) and the effect type. , Since the appearance status of the setting suggestion in the first period or the second period changes depending on which of the first set value and the second set value is set, it is possible to suppress the effect during variable display from becoming monotonous.

Further, in the variable display during effect executed in the first period and the variable display during effect executed in the second period, a pattern is set as an effect type each time the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 increases. The rate at which PT-1 to PT-7 {set value suggestion (low) or set value suggestion (high)} is determined decreases, and pattern PT-8 and pattern PT-9 {reach notice (low) and reach notice ( High)} is determined more often. Therefore, when a high setting value (for example, 5, 6) is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the setting is suggested as compared with a case where a low setting value (for example, 1 to 4) is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Is difficult to execute, so that it is difficult for the player who recognizes the effect during variable display to specify the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

Further, as in the second embodiment, in the third embodiment, the variable display effect executed in the second period is the effect type of the pattern PT-9 rather than the variable display effect executed in the first period. The rate at which {setting suggestion (high)} is determined is set high. That is, as the variable display effect is repeatedly executed, the reach notice based on the pattern PT-9 becomes easier to be executed, so that the player's expectation that the variable display effect is executed in the pattern PT-9 is maintained. Can be made to.

In the third embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-27, regardless of whether the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 1 to 6, the variable display executed in the first period is in progress. The ratio of patterns PT-1 to PT-7 {set value suggestion (low) or set value suggestion (high)} is the same between the effect and the variable display effect executed in the second period, and the ratio is the same. Although the embodiment in which the pattern PT-8 and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (low) and reach notice (high)} are determined at the same ratio is illustrated, the present invention is not limited thereto. , Even if the set values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are the same, the pattern PT-1 is obtained between the variable display effect executed in the first period and the variable display effect executed in the second period. ~ PT-7 {set value suggestion (low) or set value suggestion (high)} may be determined at different rates, and pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 {reach notice (low) or reach notice The rate at which (high)} is determined may be different.

In the third embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the first period and the variable display effect in the second period, which are the same as the variable display effect. Although the mode of executing the setting suggestion by the ratio is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the case where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display during the first period and the second period. The setting suggestion may be executed at different ratios as these variable display effects depending on the case of executing the variable display effect. By doing so, the rate (appearance rate) at which the setting suggestion is executed changes depending on whether the variable display effect is executed in the first period or the variable display effect is executed in the second period. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the effect from becoming monotonous during variable display.

Further, in the third embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-27, the variable display effect (the first variable display effect) executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the first period and the variable display executed in the second period. When executing the reach notice as the middle effect (the second variable display medium effect), an example is provided in which the reach notice is executed at different ratios according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 at the same number of times. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display effect (the first variable display effect) executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the first period and the variable display effect executed in the second period. When executing the reach notice as (the second variable display effect), if the same number of variable display effects are performed, the reach notice is given at the same ratio regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. You may do it. By doing so, if the effect is during variable display the same number of times, the rate at which the reach notice is executed (appearance status) does not change according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. , The player can still expect that the reach notice is executed by the variable display during effect executed in the first period and the variable display during effect executed in the second period.

(Sixth Invention)
As described above, the present embodiment includes the sixth invention shown below. That is, conventionally, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, the variable display result becomes a big hit by changing the set value, for example, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. There were some that could change the probability of becoming (the probability of being controlled in an advantageous state). In the gaming machine described in the above patent gazette, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a setting value depending on the type of animal displayed. For example, when such a setting suggestion effect can be repeatedly executed a plurality of times. , There is a problem that the production may be inappropriate because no consideration is given to how to execute the setting suggestion effect in the first and second times of the multiple times. .. Therefore, for the purpose of providing a game machine that can prevent the production from becoming inappropriate,
The gaming machine of means 1 of the sixth invention is
It can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and is set to one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 6) having different advantages for the player. A possible gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1)
A predetermined effect executing means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can perform a predetermined effect according to any one of a plurality of types of effect modes) as an effect during variable display, in any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7. It has a setting suggestion based on it, or a part that can execute reach notice based on patterns PT-8 and PT-9).
The effect mode of the predetermined effect is a special mode (for example, a reach notice based on the special pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9) that suggests that the predetermined effect is controlled, and a suggestion regarding the setting. Includes specific aspects (eg, setting suggestions based on any of the specific patterns PT-1 to PT-7).
The predetermined effect executing means is
The predetermined effect can be executed a plurality of times (for example, as shown in the third embodiment, a portion in which the effect during variable display can be executed in the first period and the second period before the start of the reach effect).
The predetermined effect of the specific aspect is performed when the predetermined effect is executed in the first number of the plurality of times and when the predetermined effect is executed in the second number of times after the first number of the plurality of times. It can be executed at the same ratio (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-27 as Example 3, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display during the effect in the first period, and more than in the first period. The part where the setting suggestion is executed at the same ratio as when the variable display effect is executed in the second period later)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, regardless of whether the predetermined effect of the specific mode is executed at the first time or the second number of times, the execution of the predetermined effect of the specific mode can be expected in the same manner.
More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8-27, there are cases where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the first period and a case where the variable display effect is executed in the second period. Since the setting suggestion is executed at the same ratio (65% in the example shown in FIG. 8-27) as the middle effect, it is set between the variable display effect to be executed in the first period and the variable display effect to be executed in the second period. The player can be expected to do the same for the suggestion to be executed.

The gaming machine of means 2 of the sixth invention is the gaming machine according to means 1.
The predetermined effect executing means can execute the predetermined effect of the special aspect at the same ratio when the predetermined effect is executed in the first number of times and when the predetermined effect is executed in the second number of times. For example, as shown in FIG. 8-27 as the third embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in the first period and the variable display in the second period after the first period. The part where the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 is executed at the same ratio as in the case of executing the middle effect)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, regardless of whether the predetermined effect of the special aspect is executed at the first time or the second number of times, the execution of the predetermined effect of the special aspect can be similarly expected.

The gaming machine of the means 3 of the sixth invention is the gaming machine according to the means 1.
The predetermined effect executing means can execute the predetermined effect of the special aspect at different ratios when the predetermined effect is executed in the first number of times and when the predetermined effect is executed in the second number of times (for example). , The pattern in which the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the second period after the first period is a special pattern than the variable display effect in the first period. The part that executes reach notice based on PT-8 or pattern PT-9 at a high rate)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the appearance status of the predetermined effect of the special aspect changes depending on the first number of times and the second number of times, it is possible to suppress the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.
In Example 3, if the non-execution can be determined, the execution ratio of the reach notice can be made different while the execution ratio of the setting suggestion is the same in the first period and the second period.

The gaming machine of means 4 of the sixth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3.
When the predetermined effect execution means executes the predetermined effect at the predetermined number of times among the plurality of times, the first set value is set among the plurality of set values, and the first set value is different from the first set value. 2 It is possible to execute the predetermined effect of the special aspect at the same ratio as when the set value is set (for example, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect during the first period). When the part that executes the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 at the same ratio regardless of the set value and the effect in which the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the second period In addition, the part that executes the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 at the same ratio regardless of the set value)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the appearance state of the predetermined effect of the special mode does not change regardless of the set value at the predetermined number of times, the same can be expected for the execution of the predetermined effect of the special mode.
More specifically, since the appearance status of the reach notice is the same regardless of which of the set values 1 to 6 is set, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the set value depending on the appearance status of the reach notice.

The gaming machine of means 5 of the sixth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3.
When the predetermined effect execution means executes the predetermined effect at the predetermined number of times among the plurality of times, the second set value is different from the case where the first set value is set among the plurality of set values. The predetermined effect of the special aspect can be executed at a different ratio than when the set value is set (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-27 as the third embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 is in the first period. When executing the variable display effect, the part that executes the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 at different ratios according to the set value, and the effect control CPU 120 in the second period. The part where the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 is executed at different ratios according to the set value when the variable display effect is executed in
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the appearance status of the predetermined effect of the special mode at the predetermined number of times changes according to the set value, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.

(7th invention)
As described above, the present embodiment includes the seventh invention shown below. That is, conventionally, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, the variable display result becomes a big hit by changing the set value, for example, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. There were some that could change the probability of becoming (the probability of being controlled in an advantageous state). In the gaming machine described in the above patent gazette, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a setting value depending on the type of animal displayed. For example, when such a setting suggestion effect can be repeatedly executed a plurality of times. , There is a problem that the production may be inappropriate because no consideration is given to how to execute the setting suggestion effect in the first and second times of the multiple times. .. Therefore, for the purpose of providing a game machine that can prevent the production from becoming inappropriate,
The gaming machine of means 1 of the seventh invention is
It is possible to control an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and it is set to one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 6) having different advantages for the player. A possible gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1)
A predetermined effect executing means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can perform a predetermined effect according to any one of a plurality of types of effect modes) as an effect during variable display, in any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7. It has a setting suggestion based on it, or a part that can execute reach notice based on patterns PT-8 and PT-9).
The effect mode of the predetermined effect is a special mode (for example, a reach notice based on the special pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9) that suggests that the predetermined effect is controlled, and a suggestion regarding the setting. Includes specific aspects (eg, setting suggestions based on any of the specific patterns PT-1 to PT-7).
The predetermined effect executing means is
The predetermined effect can be executed a plurality of times (for example, a portion in which the effect during variable display can be executed in the first period and the second period before the reach effect is started).
A plurality of times when the first set value is set among the plurality of set values and when the second set value different from the first set value is set among the plurality of set values. Among them, the predetermined effect of the specific mode can be executed at different ratios at a predetermined number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-27 as the third embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 performs the effect during variable display in the first period. When executing, the part where the setting suggestion based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 can be executed at different ratios according to the set value)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the appearance status of the predetermined effect of the specific mode at the predetermined number of times changes depending on which of the first set value and the second set value is set, it is possible to suppress the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous. ..
Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8-27 to 8-31, the effect control CPU 120 is variably displayed in the first period depending on which of 1 to 6 the value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is. Since the execution rate (appearance status) of the setting suggestion changes depending on whether the medium effect is executed or the variable display medium effect is executed in the second period, the player can perform not only the result of the setting suggestion but also the predetermined number of times. It is possible to predict the set value depending on the appearance status of the setting suggestion in.

The gaming machine of means 2 of the seventh invention is the gaming machine according to means 1.
The predetermined effect executing means is the special effect when the predetermined effect is executed in the first number of times out of a plurality of times and when the predetermined effect is executed in the second number of times after the first number of times. The predetermined effect of the embodiment can be executed at the same ratio (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-27 as the third embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect during the first period and the second. The part where the reach notice based on the patterns PT-8 and PT-9 can be executed at the same ratio as when the effect during variable display is executed during the period)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, regardless of whether the predetermined effect of the special aspect is executed at the first time or the second number of times, the execution of the predetermined effect of the special aspect can be similarly expected.

The gaming machine of means 3 of the seventh invention is the gaming machine according to means 1.
The predetermined effect executing means is the special effect when the predetermined effect is executed in the first number of times out of a plurality of times and when the predetermined effect is executed in the second number of times after the first number of times. It is possible to execute the predetermined effect of the mode at different ratios (for example, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the first period and when the variable display effect is executed in the second period. Reach notice based on patterns PT-8 and PT-9 at different rates)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the appearance status of the predetermined effect of the special aspect changes depending on the first number of times and the second number of times, it is possible to suppress the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.

The gaming machine of means 4 of the seventh invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3.
When the predetermined effect execution means executes the predetermined effect at the predetermined number of times among the plurality of times, the first set value is set among the plurality of set values, and the first set value is different from the first set value. 2 It is possible to execute the predetermined effect of the special aspect at the same ratio as when the set value is set (for example, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect during the first period). When the part that executes the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 at the same ratio regardless of the set value and the effect in which the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the second period In addition, the part that executes the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 at the same ratio regardless of the set value)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the appearance state of the predetermined effect of the special mode does not change regardless of the set value at the predetermined number of times, the same can be expected for the execution of the predetermined effect of the special mode.
More specifically, since the appearance status of the reach notice is the same regardless of which of the set values 1 to 6 is set, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the set value depending on the appearance status of the reach notice.

The gaming machine of means 5 of the seventh invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3.
When the predetermined effect execution means executes the predetermined effect at the predetermined number of times among the plurality of times, the second set value is different from the case where the first set value is set among the plurality of set values. The predetermined effect of the special aspect can be executed at a different ratio than when the set value is set (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-27 as the third embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 is in the first period. When executing the variable display effect, the part that executes the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 at different ratios according to the set value, and the effect control CPU 120 in the second period. The part where the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 is executed at different ratios according to the set value when the variable display effect is executed in
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the appearance status of the predetermined effect of the special mode at the predetermined number of times changes according to the set value, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.

In the second and third embodiments of the feature unit 103SG of the above-described embodiment, the variable display effect can be executed twice during one variable display, and when the execution of the variable display effect is determined, the first period In each of the second period and the second period, a mode of determining whether to execute the reach notice or the setting suggestion based on the fluctuation pattern and the set value has been illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first period is not limited to this. Determines whether to execute the reach notice or the setting suggestion based on the set value regardless of the fluctuation pattern, while for the second period, the reach notice and the setting suggestion are based on the fluctuation pattern and the set value. It may be decided which to be executed, that is, whether to execute the effect to be executed in the first period or the second period according to different judgment criteria.

For example, as shown in FIG. 8-32 as Example 4, the first period and the first period between the start timing of the variable display and the start timing of the reach effect of the normal reach are targeted for the fluctuation patterns of the normal reach and the super reach. It is possible to execute the variable display effect in the second period after the first period. Since the variable display time is short to execute the variable display effect twice or more for the non-reach and small hit variation patterns, in the fourth embodiment, the variable display effect is executed as the normal reach and super reach variation patterns. Limited to.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, in the variable display effect determination process described above, when the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach, the type of the variable display effect is determined based on the set value for the first period. In the second period, a process of determining the type of effect during variable display is executed based on the fluctuation pattern. In the following, the variable display effect determination process in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-33.

As shown in FIGS. 8-33, in the effect determination process during variable display, the effect control CPU 120 first identifies the variation pattern (103SGS311). As described above, the variation pattern can be specified by the variation pattern specification command stored in the variation pattern specification command storage area. Then, it is determined whether the specified fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach (103SGS312), and if it is normal reach or super reach, the process proceeds to 103SG313, and if it is other than normal reach or super reach, that is, a non-reach or small hit fluctuation pattern. In this case, since it is not the target of the variable display effect, the variable display effect determination process is terminated.

When the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach in 103SGS312, the set value stored in the RAM 102 is read out to specify the current set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (103SGS313). Next, based on the set value specified by 103SGS313, whether or not the variable display effect is executed in the first period and the effect type (effect pattern) when the variable display effect is executed are determined by a variable display effect execution determination table (not shown). It is determined using (common to normal reach and super reach) (103SGS314).

As shown in FIG. 8-34 (A), in 103SGS314, the effect control CPU 120 uses a variable display effect execution determination table whose fluctuation pattern is common to normal reach or super reach, and reaches notice, setting suggestion, and non-execution. Decide on one of. Specifically, when the setting value is 1, the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution of the reach notice (low) at a rate of 40%, the setting suggestion at a rate of 40%, and the non-execution at a rate of 10%. Determined by percentage. Further, in the case of the set value 6, the execution of the reach notice (low) is determined at a rate of 40%, the setting suggestion is determined at a rate of 55%, and the non-execution is determined at a rate of 5%. Although the execution ratio corresponding to the set values 2 to 5 is omitted here, the reach notice is determined by the common execution ratio regardless of the set value 1 to 6, and the setting suggestion is set. It is set so that the larger the value is, the higher the execution rate of the setting suggestion and the execution rate of the setting suggestion (high).

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8-35, paying attention to the effect type determination ratio during variable display in the first period, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the first period The effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed is determined to be non-execution at a rate of 20%, and pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 39%. Then, the pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined at a rate of 1%, and the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined at a rate of 40%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, it is determined that the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is not executed at a rate of 18%. Pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} was decided at a rate of 8%, and pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a rate of 1.2%. The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined at a rate of 40%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, it is determined that the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is not executed at a rate of 15%. Pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} was decided at a rate of 5%, and pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a rate of 1.5%. The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined at a rate of 40%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is determined not to be executed at a rate of 12.5%. Pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} was decided at a rate of 45.5%, and pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a rate of 2%. The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined at a rate of 40%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 5, it is determined that the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is not executed at a rate of 10%. Pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} was decided at a rate of 5%, and pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a rate of 3.5%. The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined at a rate of 40%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is determined to be non-execution at a rate of 5%, and 50%. Pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} was determined, and pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was determined at a ratio of 5%, and a ratio of 40%. To determine the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)}.

Returning to FIG. 8-33, it is determined in 103SGS314 whether or not the execution of the variable display effect in the first period is determined (103SGS315), and if the execution is determined, the determined effect type (patterns PT-1 to PT). -9) is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (103SGS316), and a variable display effect execution decision flag indicating that the execution of the variable display effect in the first period is determined is set (103SGS317). Proceed to 103SGS318. If execution is not decided in 103SGS315, that is, if non-execution is decided, the process proceeds to 103SGS318.

Next, in 103SGS318, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the fluctuation pattern is normal reach (103SGS318), and if it is determined to be normal reach, the second is based on the specified fluctuation pattern and set value. Whether or not the variable display effect is executed during the period and the effect type (effect pattern) when the effect is executed are determined using a variable display effect execution determination table (for normal reach) (not shown) (103SGS319).

As shown in FIG. 8-34 (B), in 103SGS319, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether to reach notice, setting suggestion, or non-execution by using the variable display during effect execution determination table for normal reach. Specifically, when the setting value is 1, the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution of the reach notice (low) at a rate of 60%, the setting suggestion at a rate of 35%, and the non-execution at a rate of 5%. Determined by percentage. Further, in the case of the set value 6, the execution of the reach notice (low) is determined at a rate of 60%, the setting suggestion is determined at a rate of 35%, and the non-execution is determined at a rate of 5%. Although the execution ratio corresponding to the set values 2 to 5 is omitted here, the reach notice and the setting suggestion are determined by the common execution ratio regardless of the set value 1 to 6, and the setting suggestion ( For high), the execution rate is set to increase as the set value increases.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8-36, paying attention to the case of normal reach regarding the variable display advance notice effect type determination ratio in the second period, the case where the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1. Determines the non-execution of the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period at a rate of 5%, and patterns PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (setting suggestion) at a rate of 33%. Low)}, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 2%, and pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 55%. The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined at a rate of 5%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, it is determined that the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is not executed at a rate of 5%. Pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} was decided at a rate of 8%, and pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a rate of 2.2%. The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is decided at a rate of 55%, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 5%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, it is determined that the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is not executed at a rate of 5%. Pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} was decided at a rate of 5%, and pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a rate of 2.5%. The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is decided at a rate of 55%, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 5%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is determined to be non-execution at a rate of 5%, and 32%. Pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} was decided, and pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a ratio of 3%, and a ratio of 55%. In, the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 5%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 5, it is determined that the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is not executed at a rate of 5%. Pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} was decided at a rate of 5%, and pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a rate of 4.5%. The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is decided at a rate of 55%, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 5%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is determined to be non-execution at a rate of 5%, and 29%. Pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} was decided, and pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a ratio of 6%, and a ratio of 55%. In, the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 5%.

Further, when it is determined in 103SGS318 that the fluctuation pattern is not the normal reach, that is, it is the super reach, whether or not the variable display during the second period is executed and the execution are performed based on the specified fluctuation pattern and the set value. The effect type (effect pattern) in the case of performing is determined using a variable display effect execution determination table (for super reach) (not shown) (103SGS320).

As shown in FIG. 8-34 (C), in the 103SGS320, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether to reach notice, setting suggestion, or non-execution by using the effect execution determination table during variable display for super reach. .. Specifically, in the case of the setting value 1 and the setting value 6, the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution of the reach notice (low) at a rate of 60%, determines the setting suggestion at a rate of 40%, and does not execute. Do not decide. Although the execution ratio corresponding to the set values 2 to 5 is omitted here, the reach notice and the setting suggestion are determined by the common execution ratio regardless of the set value 1 to 6, and the setting suggestion ( For high), the execution rate is set to increase as the set value increases.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8-36, paying attention to the case of super reach regarding the variable display advance notice effect type determination ratio in the second period, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1. In this case, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is determined to be pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 36%, and 4%. The ratio was determined to be pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)}, the ratio was determined to be pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)}, and the ratio was 55% to determine pattern PT-9 { Reach notice (high)} will be decided.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to the pattern PT-1 to pattern at a rate of 35.8%. Determined to be PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)}, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 4.2%, and pattern PT-8 {reach at a rate of 5%. The notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 55%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to the pattern PT-1 to pattern at a rate of 35.5%. Determined to be PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)}, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 4.5%, and pattern PT-8 {reach at a rate of 5%. The notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 55%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to pattern PT-1 to pattern PT- at a rate of 35%. 4 {Setting suggestion (low)} was decided, and pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a rate of 5%, and pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low) was decided at a rate of 5%. }, And the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 55%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 5, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to the pattern PT-1 to pattern at a rate of 33.5%. Determined to be PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)}, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 6.5%, and pattern PT-8 {reach at a rate of 5%. The notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 55%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to pattern PT-1 to pattern PT- at a rate of 32%. 4 {Setting suggestion (low)} was decided, and pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a rate of 8%, and pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low) was decided at a rate of 5%. }, And the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 55%.

Returning to FIG. 8-33, it is determined in 103SGS319 or 103SGS320 whether or not the execution of the variable display effect in the second period is determined (103SGS321), and if the execution is determined, the determined effect type (pattern PT-1). ~ PT-9) is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (103SGS322), and the variable display effect execution decision flag indicating that the execution of the variable display effect in the second period is determined is set (103SGS323). ), Ends the effect during variable display. If the execution is not decided in 103SGS321, that is, if the non-execution is decided, the variable display during effect ends.

As described above, in the fourth embodiment, when the variable display effect is executed in the first period of the plurality of times, the installation value is 1 to 1 regardless of whether the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach. When deciding whether or not to execute the setting suggestion based on which of 6 is executed, and when the variable display effect is executed in the second period, it depends on whether the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach. Reach notice or setting suggestion is determined based on a separate judgment table. That is, since the criteria for determining whether to execute the reach notice or the setting suggestion is different between the first period and the second period, it is possible to suppress the effect during variable display from becoming monotonous.

Further, since the execution rate of the setting suggestion in the first period is higher than the execution rate of the setting suggestion in the second period, the setting suggestion is easily executed in the first period, whereas the reach notice is given in the second period. Is easier to execute, so even though it becomes normal reach or super reach in the second period, the setting suggestion does not become easier to execute in both the first period and the second period, and , Since the reach notice is executed in the first period and the setting suggestion is not easily executed in the second period, the setting suggestion and the reach notice can be executed in a well-balanced manner.

Further, since the execution rate of the reach notice in the second period is higher than the execution rate of the reach notice in the first period, it is variablely displayed by executing the reach notice in both the first period and the second period. It is possible to prevent the medium production from becoming monotonous. However, as shown in FIGS. 8-35 to 8-37, paying attention to each set value, when the variable display effect is executed in the first period, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not included. When the execution of the reach notice is decided at the same ratio (40%) and the variable display effect is executed in the second period, the reach notice is executed regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is decided at the same ratio (60%). Therefore, in the variable display during effect executed in the first period and the variable display during effect executed in the second period, regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the reach notice is executed. The player can be noticed in the same way.

In addition, even if the set value is set high (for example, set values 5 and 6), in the case of normal reach or super reach, not only is the reach notice easier to execute than the setting suggestion in the second period, but also the super reach In this case, the reach notice (high) is likely to be executed, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's expectation for a big hit.

Furthermore, even if the execution of the setting suggestion is decided in the second period, the setting suggestion (high) is more likely to be executed than in the case where the execution of the setting suggestion is decided in the first period. Is executed, the player's expectation for the high setting can be increased.

Further, in the first period, when the set value is 1, the execution of the reach notice and the setting suggestion is determined at the same ratio, whereas when the set value is 6, that is, the set values are 1, 2, The higher the setting is in the order of 3, 4, 5, and 6, the higher the execution of the setting suggestion is determined than the reach notice. Therefore, the higher the setting, the easier it is for the setting suggestion to appear. It will be easier to predict.

In the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-34, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect (the first variable display effect) in the first period and in the second period. The present invention exemplifies a mode in which the execution of the reach notice is determined at different ratios depending on whether the variable display effect (the second variable display effect) is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. , The execution of the reach notice may be determined at the same ratio depending on whether the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the first period or the variable display effect in the second period. .. By doing so, it is possible to make the player similarly expect the execution of the reach notice in the first variable display effect and the second variable display effect.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-34, if the effect is during the variable display of the same number of times, the reach notice is executed at the same ratio regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Although the form to be determined is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the production during variable display of the same number of times, the reach notice is executed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. May be determined at different rates. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the execution of the same effect type from being determined between the first variable display effect and the second variable display effect, so that the variable display effect becomes monotonous. It can be suppressed.

(8th invention)
As described above, the present embodiment includes the eighth invention shown below. That is, conventionally, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, the variable display result becomes a big hit by changing the set value, for example, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. There were some that could change the probability of becoming (the probability of being controlled in an advantageous state). In the gaming machine described in the above patent gazette, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a setting value depending on the type of animal displayed. For example, when such a setting suggestion effect can be repeatedly executed a plurality of times. , There is a problem that the production may be inappropriate because no consideration is given to how to execute the setting suggestion effect in the first and second times of the multiple times. .. Therefore, for the purpose of providing a game machine that can prevent the production from becoming inappropriate,
The gaming machine of means 1 of the eighth invention is
It can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and is set to one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 6) having different advantages for the player. A possible gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1)
Whether the variable display pattern determining means capable of determining one variable display pattern from the plurality of variable display patterns (for example, the CPU 103 sets the display result as "big hit" or "small hit" in the variable pattern setting process of S111. Based on the result of pre-determination of whether or not, the part that determines the fluctuation pattern to one of multiple types using the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern) and
A variable display means capable of executing variable display according to a determined variable display pattern (for example, the effect control CPU 120 performs a variable display during effect process, and a decorative pattern is displayed based on a display result or a variable pattern specified by an effect control command. The part that executes variable display) and
Predetermined effect determining means for determining one of a plurality of types of the effect mode of the predetermined effect (for example, in the variable display effect determination process, the effect pattern of the variable display effect is the pattern PT-1 to PT-9. The part that decides one from),
A predetermined effect executing means capable of executing the predetermined effect based on the determination result of the predetermined effect determining means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 as the effect during variable display. Setting suggestion or reach notice based on patterns PT-8 and PT-9) and
With
The effect mode of the predetermined effect is a special mode (for example, a reach notice based on the special pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9) that suggests that the predetermined effect is controlled, and a suggestion regarding the setting. Includes specific aspects (eg, setting suggestions based on any of the specific patterns PT-1 to PT-7).
The predetermined effect executing means is
The predetermined effect can be executed a plurality of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-32 as the fourth embodiment, a portion in which the variable display effect can be executed in the first period and the second period before the reach effect is started. ),
Based on at least the set value, the effect mode of the predetermined effect to be executed in the first of a plurality of times is determined (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-33 as the fourth embodiment, the effect control is performed. The part in which the CPU 120 determines the effect type of the variable display effect based on the set value in the variable display effect in the first period),
At least based on the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means, the effect mode of the predetermined effect to be executed in the second number of times after the first number of times is determined (for example, Example). As shown in FIG. 8-33 as No. 4, the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect type of the variable display effect based on the set value and the fluctuation pattern set in the variable display effect in the second period. )
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the determination criteria for determining the effect mode of the predetermined effect are different between the first and second times, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.
Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8-33, when determining the effect type of the variable display effect in the first period (the first variable display effect), the variable display is being performed based on the variable display variation pattern. Determine the production type of the production * Isn't it a set value? (Refer to 103SGS314) On the other hand, when determining the effect type of the variable display effect (second variable display effect) in the second period, the variation pattern of the variable display and the setting set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 The effect type of the variable display effect is determined based on the value (see 103SGS319 and 103SGS320). That is, since the judgment criteria for determining the effect type are different between the first variable display effect and the second variable display effect, the first variable display effect and the second variable display effect It is possible to prevent the execution of the same effect type from being decided by, and it is possible to suppress that the effect during variable display becomes monotonous.

The gaming machine of the means 2 of the eighth invention is the gaming machine according to the means 1.
The predetermined effect executing means can execute the predetermined effect of the special aspect at the same ratio when the predetermined effect is executed in the first number of times and when the predetermined effect is executed in the second number of times. For example, the effect control CPU 120 gives a reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 depending on whether the variable display effect is executed in the first period or the variable display effect is executed in the second period. Part to be executed at the same rate)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, regardless of whether the predetermined effect of the special aspect is executed at the first time or the second number of times, the execution of the predetermined effect of the special aspect can be similarly expected.

The gaming machine of means 3 of the eighth invention is the gaming machine according to means 1.
The predetermined effect executing means can execute the predetermined effect of the special aspect at different ratios when the predetermined effect is executed in the first number of times and when the predetermined effect is executed in the second number of times (for example). As shown in FIG. 8-34 as the fourth embodiment, the pattern PT is obtained when the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the first period and the variable display effect in the second period. -8 or the part that executes reach notice based on pattern PT-9 at different rates)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the appearance status of the predetermined effect of the special aspect changes depending on the first number of times and the second number of times, it is possible to suppress the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.

The gaming machine of means 4 of the eighth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3.
When the predetermined effect execution means executes the predetermined effect at the predetermined number of times among the plurality of times, the first set value is set among the plurality of set values, and the first set value is different from the first set value. 2 The predetermined effect of the special aspect can be executed at the same ratio as when the set value is set (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-34 as the fourth embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 is the first. When executing the variable display effect during the period, the part that executes the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 at the same ratio regardless of the set value, and the effect control CPU 120 are the first. A part in which the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 is executed at the same ratio regardless of the set value when the variable display effect is executed in two periods)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the appearance state of the predetermined effect of the special mode does not change regardless of the set value at the predetermined number of times, the same can be expected for the execution of the predetermined effect of the special mode.

The gaming machine of means 5 of the eighth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3.
When the predetermined effect execution means executes the predetermined effect at the predetermined number of times among the plurality of times, the second set value is different from the case where the first set value is set among the plurality of set values. It is possible to execute the predetermined effect of the special aspect at a different ratio than when the set value is set (for example, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect during the first period, it is set. It is set when the part that executes the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 at different ratios according to the set value and when the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the second period. The part that executes the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 at different rates depending on the set value)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the appearance status of the predetermined effect of the special mode at the predetermined number of times changes according to the set value, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.

In the fourth embodiment, regardless of whether the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach, in the first period, a mode of determining whether to execute the setting suggestion or the reach notice according to the set value is illustrated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the first period, regardless of the fluctuation pattern, it is decided whether to execute the setting suggestion or the reach notice according only to the set value. You may.

Further, in the second period, an example is exemplified in which the execution of the reach notice is determined in preference to the setting suggestion according to the fluctuation pattern being normal reach or super reach, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, in the second period, the reach notice and the setting suggestion may be determined at the same ratio depending on whether the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, in the second period, an embodiment in which it is determined whether to execute the reach notice or the setting suggestion depending on whether the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach is illustrated, but the present invention illustrates the embodiment. Not limited to this, in the second period, not only when the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach, but also when it is non-reach or small hit, either reach notice or setting suggestion is executed. You may decide whether or not.

(Modification 2)
In Examples 2 to 4 of the feature unit 103SG of the above-described embodiment, the effect during variable display can be executed twice during one variable display, and the variable display is started for the fluctuation patterns of normal reach and super reach. An example has been made in which the variable display effect can be executed in the first period between the timing and the start timing of the reach effect of the normal reach and the second period after the first period. The effect is not limited to the above, and the effect during variable display may be executed three times or more during one variable display. In addition, by temporarily stopping the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol and then restarting the variable display, the variable display of one variable display is simulated multiple times. It may be executed at the timing corresponding to the re-variation of the decorative pattern in the variation pattern accompanied by the pseudo-continuous effect shown as.

For example, as shown in FIG. 8-38 as a modification 2, from the start timing of the variable display to the start timing of the reach effect of the normal reach for all the fluctuation patterns of non-reach / small hit, normal reach, and super reach. Therefore, the first period before the temporary stop of the first decorative symbol, the second period after the first period and corresponding to the revariable display period after the first temporary stop of the decorative symbol, and It is possible to execute the effect during variable display in the third period, which is after the second period and corresponds to the revariable display period after the third temporary stop of the decorative symbol.

In the second modification, the first period is exemplified before the temporary stop of the first decorative symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first period is the first time. The second period is executed according to the revariable display in the temporary stop of the decorative symbol, the second period is executed in response to the revariable display in the temporary stop of the second decorative symbol, and the third period is executed in response to the revariable display in the temporary stop of the decorative symbol. It may be executed according to the revariable display.

In the second modification, in the above-described variable display effect determination process, any of the set values 1 to 6 set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set for the first period regardless of which the fluctuation pattern is. Variable display is in progress according to whether it is set to. For the second and third periods, variable display is in progress based on the set value only when the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach. Executes the process of determining the type of effect.

Specifically, in the first period, the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution of the setting suggestion at a rate of 100% regardless of the fluctuation pattern (the execution of the reach notice is not determined). It should be noted that the larger the set value is in the order of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6, the higher the execution rate of the setting suggestion (high) is set. In the second period, only when the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach, the execution of the reach notice is determined at a rate of 40%, and the execution of the setting suggestion is determined at a rate of 60%. It should be noted that the larger the set value is in the order of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6, the higher the execution rate of the setting suggestion (high) is set. In the third period, only when the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach, the execution of the reach notice is determined at a rate of 100%, and the execution of the setting suggestion is not determined. It should be noted that the larger the set value is in the order of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6, the higher the execution rate of the setting suggestion (high) is set.

In addition, while the ratio of determining the setting suggestion in the second period and the third period is set to be lower than the ratio of determining the setting suggestion in the first period, the reach notice is determined in the first period. By setting the ratio for determining the reach notice in the second period and the third period to be higher than the ratio, the reach notice is more likely to be executed than the setting suggestion as the effect during variable display is repeatedly executed. Become.

As described above, in the present modification 2, when the variable display effect is executed in the first period, one of the effect patterns PT-1 to PT-7 corresponding to the setting suggestion is determined, and the second period and the second period and the second. When the variable display effect is executed in the three periods, one of the effect patterns PT-1 to PT-9 is determined based on at least the variation pattern. That is, since the determination criteria when the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect mode of the predetermined effect differs between the first period and the second period or the third period, it is possible to prevent the effect during variable display from becoming monotonous.

More specifically, the fluctuation pattern accompanied by the pseudo-continuous effect is a fluctuation pattern in which the expectation of a big hit increases as the number of revariable displays increases in the order of 1, 2, 3, .... Therefore, in the first period corresponding to the first revariable display, there is a high possibility that the fluctuation pattern is not super reach, so the setting suggestion is executed with priority over the reach notice, and the second revariable display is performed. In the second period corresponding to the display, there is a high possibility that the fluctuation pattern is not non-reach, but there is a possibility of normal reach, so the setting suggestion is executed prior to the reach notice, and the third revariation is performed. In the third period corresponding to the display, since the fluctuation pattern has a high possibility of super reach, the reach notice is executed with priority over the setting suggestion.

By doing so, it is possible to suggest the setting while suppressing the frequent occurrence of reach notice and the decrease in the reliability of the reach notice in the case of a fluctuation pattern accompanied by one or two pseudo continuous effects. On the other hand, it is possible to prevent the player's expectation for the big hit from being lowered due to the frequent occurrence of setting suggestions in the case of a fluctuation pattern accompanied by three pseudo-continuous effects.

Further, in the present modification 2, in the first period when the jackpot reliability is the lowest, the setting suggestion is preferred because the execution of the setting suggestion is prioritized over the reach notice according to the set value regardless of the fluctuation pattern. On the other hand, in the second period and the third period when the jackpot reliability is higher than the first period, the execution of the reach notice is set according to the fluctuation pattern of normal reach or super reach than the suggestion. Since the decision is given priority, the player's expectation for the big hit can be suitably increased.

In the second modification, the execution of the setting suggestion is determined at a rate of 100% in the first period, but the execution of the setting suggestion is determined at a higher rate than the reach notice in the first period. If so, it does not have to determine the execution of the setting suggestion at a rate of 100%. Further, in the second period, the embodiment in which the execution of the setting suggestion is determined at a higher rate than the reach notice is illustrated, but the execution of the reach notice may be decided at a higher rate than the setting suggestion. Further, in the third period, the form in which the execution of the reach notice is determined at a rate of 100% is illustrated, but in the third period, if the execution of the reach notice is determined at a rate higher than the setting suggestion, the reach notice is announced. The execution does not have to be determined at a 100% rate.

Further, in the present modification 2, in the first period, the execution of the setting suggestion is prioritized over the reach notice according to the set value regardless of the fluctuation pattern, and in the second period and the third period, the fluctuation pattern is determined. Although the embodiment in which the execution of the reach notice is determined in preference to the setting suggestion according to the normal reach or the super reach is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first period and the second period are not limited thereto. Then, regardless of the fluctuation pattern, the execution of the setting suggestion is prioritized over the reach notice according to the set value, and in the third period, the reach notice is executed according to the fluctuation pattern being normal reach or super reach. May be prioritized over the setting suggestion.

Further, in the present modification 2, the embodiment in which the execution of the setting suggestion is determined prior to the reach notice according to the set value is illustrated in the first period, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of forms are illustrated. In the first number of times (for example, the first period or the second period), if at least the setting suggestion or reach notice is determined according to the set value, the setting suggestion or the setting suggestion or the setting suggestion is made according to the fluctuation pattern. The reach notice may be decided.

Further, in the second modification, in the second period and the third period, the embodiment in which the execution of the reach notice is determined prior to the setting suggestion according to the set value and the fluctuation pattern is illustrated. It is not limited, and in the second number (for example, the second period or the third period) after the first of the plurality of times, the setting suggestion or the reach notice is determined at least according to the fluctuation pattern. If there is, the setting suggestion or reach notice may be determined according to the set value and the fluctuation pattern.

Further, in Examples 2 to 4, as the variable display effect to be executed in the first period, the setting suggestion is made by making the ratio at which the execution of the setting suggestion is determined higher than the ratio at which the reach notice is determined. Although the embodiment in which execution is prioritized and determined is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 8-15 as Example 1, the variable display executed in the first period is in progress. As the effect, the execution of the setting suggestion may be prioritized and determined according to the order of the processes for determining the effect type.

Further, in the second to fourth embodiments, as the variable display effect to be executed in the second period, the reach notice is announced by making the ratio at which the execution of the reach notice is determined higher than the ratio at which the setting suggestion is determined. Although the embodiment in which execution is prioritized and determined is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 8-15 as Example 1, the variable display executed in the second period is in progress. As the effect, the execution of the reach notice may be prioritized and determined according to the order of the processes for determining the effect type.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and the present invention may be changed or added without departing from the gist of the present invention. include.

For example, in the above-described embodiment, an embodiment in which the effect during variable display can be executed a plurality of times in one variable display is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of reach notices and setting suggestions are given. It may be feasible over variable display (see means 5 of the second invention).

Specifically, the CPU 103 holds and stores information about the variable display whose execution is suspended when the start winning prize occurs (for example, a display result (including a jackpot type) or a random number value for determining a fluctuation pattern). The display result and the fluctuation pattern are pre-read and determined based on the extracted random number value, and the determination result is transmitted to the effect control board 12 as an effect control command at the time of starting winning, so that the effect control CPU 120 can perform the effect control CPU 120. When the pre-reading notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display in which execution is suspended) can be executed, the variable display (target fluctuation) based on the hold memory that is the target of the pre-reading notice is displayed. A reach notice or a setting suggestion as a look-ahead notice for a target change may be executed over a plurality of variable displays until the start.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 displays a plurality of images Z1 indicating the paraglider displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 in the variable display effect in a variable display of the 103SG277 at a predetermined timing. An example of a mode in which a process of executing a process of destroying and changing the number of images Z1 corresponding to the effect patterns PT-1 to PT-9 determined in the medium effect determination process into images Z2 indicating that the images Z1 are dropped has been illustrated. Is not limited to this, and when the operation of the push button 31B (or the stick controller 31A may be used) by the player is detected by the push sensor 35B, the image Z2 is changed at the timing corresponding to the operation. You may let it.

Further, when the effect control CPU 120 changes to the image Z2 at the timing corresponding to the operation by the player as described above in the variable display effect, the player operates the push button 31B during the operation valid period of the push button 31B. As the operation promotion effect for prompting, an operation promotion image (for example, a character image or a button image of "continuous hitting!") May be displayed in the display area of the image display device 5.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 displays an operation promotion image prompting the player to operate the push button 31B when the push sensor 35B detects a specific operation of operating the push button 31B during the operation valid period of the push button 31B. Regardless of whether or not the push button 31B is operated, the effect of changing the image Z1 to the image Z2 (destroying the paraglider and dropping it) can be executed according to the operation of the push button 31B, and the operation of the push button 31B is not detected. In that case, the paraglider may be faded out without being destroyed, that is, the effect during variable display may be terminated without giving a reach notice or setting suggestion.

By doing so, the player who knows the specific motion can execute the effect of changing the image Z1 to the image Z2 at a desired timing by performing the specific motion, so that the game entertainment can be improved. ..

As an operation promoting effect for encouraging the player to operate the push button 31B during the operation valid period of the push button 31B, an operation promoting image for encouraging the player to operate the push button 31B is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the variable display effect is executed without displaying the operation promotion image in the display area of the image display device 5 in which the variable display effect is executed. Even if the operation promotion effect is executed by emitting light from a light emitting unit built in or around the push button 31B provided at a position different from the display area of the image display device 5 that the player pays attention to. Good. By doing so, only the player who knows the specific movement or the player who notices the light emission can see the reach notice and the setting suggestion, so that the interest of the game is improved.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, as a predetermined effect in which the effect result is an advantageous state suggestion result, a mode in which a reach notice suggesting the possibility of reaching is applied has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited thereto. The predetermined effect, which is the result of suggesting an advantageous state, is a stop symbol notice that suggests at which symbol the variable display symbol stops, a character notice in which a character appears, and a step in which the notice image changes stepwise. Various warning effects can be applied as long as it is a suggestion effect suggesting the possibility of a big hit, such as a close-up notice or a group notice in which a group of predetermined characters crosses the display area.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the variable display effect has a common effect period for the reach notice and the setting suggestion, but the effect mode differs between the reach notice and the setting suggestion (corresponding to the common effect period). It may be a separate production (specifically, the reach notice is a suggestion using a character, the setting suggestion is a suggestion by a paraglider, etc.). Then, even when the reach notice and the setting suggestion having different production modes are executed together in the same period (same timing), the reach notice may be executed with priority over the setting suggestion.

For example, the first effect image corresponding to the reach notice and the second effect image corresponding to the setting suggestion unlike the first effect image are displayed together in the display area of the image display device 5 for the same period (same timing). In this case, for example, the visibility of the first effect image is increased by making the display area of the first effect image larger than the display area of the second effect image, or by changing the display mode such as emission color, brightness, and contrast. Is made higher than the visibility of the second effect image, so that the reach notice can be executed with priority over the setting suggestion.

When the effect control CPU 120 can draw an image on a plurality of drawing layers, for example, the first effect image corresponding to the reach notice is drawn on the first drawing layer among the plurality of drawing layers and is set. When drawing the second effect image corresponding to the suggestion in the second drawing layer lower than the first drawing layer, the image display device 5 draws the image drawn in the first drawing layer and the second drawing layer. When the images are combined and displayed in duplicate, the visibility of the first effect image becomes higher than the visibility of the second effect image because the first effect image is duplicated in the second effect image. Therefore, it is possible to execute the reach notice in preference to the setting suggestion. Further, when the second effect image is drawn on the upper first drawing layer and the first effect image is drawn on the lower second drawing layer, the opacity of the second effect image is higher than the opacity of the first effect image. By lowering the transmittance (making the transmittance of the second effect image higher than the transmittance of the first effect image), it is possible to execute the reach notice with priority over the setting suggestion.

Further, by making the sound effects such as the volume and sound quality of the sound effects output from the speakers 8L and 8R different between the reach notice and the setting suggestion, the audibility of the sound effect corresponding to the reach notice corresponds to the setting suggestion. It may be higher than the audibility of, that is, the sound effect corresponding to the reach notice may be easier to hear than the sound effect corresponding to the setting suggestion. As a method of increasing the audibility of the sound effect corresponding to the reach notice, for example, not only the volume of the sound effect is increased, but also the volume of other sounds such as BGM is decreased to enhance the audibility. May be good. It should be noted that the sound effect corresponding to the reach notice is output, but the sound effect corresponding to the setting suggestion is not output.

Further, when the effect control CPU 120 has a plurality of reproduction channels (for example, reproduction channels 0 to 31) and can execute control to output the effect sound from the speakers 8L and 8R using any of the reproduction channels. In, for example, the first effect sound corresponding to the reach notice can be reproduced on the first reproduction channel, and the second effect sound corresponding to the setting suggestion can be reproduced on the second reproduction channel different from the first reproduction channel. At the same time, when the first effect sound and the second effect sound are reproduced from different reproduction channels (first reproduction channel and second reproduction channel) at the same timing, the first effect sound reproduced in the first reproduction channel By making the volume and sound quality different (improving) from the volume and sound quality of the second production sound reproduced on the second playback channel, the audibility of the first production sound is made higher than the audibility of the second production sound. It is also possible to prioritize the reach notice over the setting suggestion.

Further, by making the light emitting mode such as the light emitting color, the lighting mode, and the brightness of the game effect lamp 9 different between the reach notice and the setting suggestion, the visibility of the light emitting mode corresponding to the reach notice is the visual recognition of the sound effect corresponding to the setting suggestion. It may be higher than the sex, that is, the light emitting mode corresponding to the reach notice may be easier to see than the light emitting mode corresponding to the setting suggestion. It should be noted that the light is turned on in response to the reach notice, but the light is turned off without being turned on in response to the setting suggestion.

That is, to execute the reach notice with priority over the setting suggestion means that the effect result is either the advantageous state suggestion result or the setting suggestion result as described in Examples 1 to 4 and Modifications 1 and 2. In some cases, not only the execution rate of the reach notice is increased, but also when the effect result is both the advantageous state suggestion result and the setting suggestion result, the effect mode such as the reach notice display, sound, and light is more than the setting suggestion effect mode. Including priority. Furthermore, executing the reach notice with priority over the setting suggestion means that the execution ratio, display, and sound are such that the effect of the reach notice given to the player is higher than the effect of the setting suggestion given to the player. It also includes performing different production modes such as light, light, and movement of a movable body.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the setting suggestion, as a suggestion regarding the setting in the CPU 103, a mode suggesting which of the set values 1 to 6 is set is exemplified, but the present invention is limited to this. However, as a suggestion regarding the setting in the CPU 103, for example, the possibility that the set value has been changed or the possibility that the set value has not been changed (deferred) may be suggested.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a mode in which the jackpot gaming state is applied is illustrated as an example of an advantageous state advantageous for the player, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the prize ball is paid out more than in the normal state. High base state (time saving state) where conditions are likely to be satisfied, high probability gaming state (high probability state) with high probability of becoming a big hit game state, high probability low base state (latent probability change state), special reach state (for example) , Super reach, etc.), including the state where the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern based on the jackpot fluctuation pattern.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko game machine 1 is illustrated as an example of the game machine, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a game ball having a predetermined number of balls is a game machine. The number of rented balls that are circulated inside and lent out in response to the player's request for rent and the number of prize balls given in response to winning are added, while the number of game balls used in the game is subtracted. The present invention can also be applied to a so-called enclosed gaming machine that is stored and stored. In these enclosed game machines, points and points are given to the player instead of the game ball, and the points and points given are given to the game value.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a spherical game ball (pachinko ball) has been applied as an example of the game medium, but the present invention is not limited to the spherical game medium, and for example, a non-spherical game such as a medal. It may be a medium.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine is applied as an example of the gaming machine, but for example, the game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the game value. At the same time, one game is completed by deriving the variable display result to the variable display device capable of variablely displaying a plurality of types of symbols that can be identified by each, and according to the variable display result derived to the variable display device. It can also be applied to slot machines that can generate prizes.

Further, in the slot machine, the advantageous state for the player is a state in which a big bonus bonus or a regular bonus that increases the winning probability of a small winning combination, or a state in which an operation mode advantageous for the player is notified (for example, an AT (assist time) state). ), A state in which an operation mode advantageous to the player is notified, and a state in which the winning probability of the replay combination is increased (for example, an ART (assist replay time) state) and the like are included.

Further, when the predetermined effect of the present invention can be executed on the slot machine, a special role such as a big bonus bonus or a regular bonus is internally won, but it is carried over to a special role when the combination of symbols is not aligned. Suggestion effects that suggest the possibility that the combination of the corresponding symbols may be derived and displayed, and setting suggestions that suggest the setting values set in the slot machine can be executed over multiple games (variable display multiple times), or the AT state. It is possible to execute the game over a plurality of games (multiple variable displays) until the AT state or the ART state is won and the AT state or the ART state is started.

The present invention is not limited to those described above. Further, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention, in addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiments described later.

Further, all or a part of the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modification, and the configurations shown in the following embodiment and each modification may be arbitrarily combined.

It should be noted that the above-described embodiment and the following-described embodiment disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and are not considered to be restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of claims rather than the above description and the description below, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

The gaming machine of the present invention is also advantageous for the player by launching a gaming medium (for example, a gaming ball) into the gaming area (for example, the left gaming area 151SG002L or the right gaming area 151SG002R) and playing a game. A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) and can be set to any of a plurality of set values (for example, set values 1 to 6) having different advantages for the player (for example, a gaming machine). For example, in the pachinko gaming machine 1), a predetermined effect executing means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a predetermined effect in any of a plurality of types of effect modes) as a pattern during variable display. A setting suggestion based on any one of PT-1 to PT-7, or a portion capable of executing a reach notice based on patterns PT-8 and PT-9) is provided, and the effect mode of the predetermined effect is controlled to the advantageous state. A special mode (for example, a reach notice based on the special pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9) that suggests that the setting is to be performed, and a specific mode that suggests the setting (for example, the pattern PT-1 that is a specific pattern). The special aspect is controlled to the first special aspect (for example, reach notice (low)) and the advantageous state more than the first special aspect, including the setting suggestion based on any of PT-7. The specific aspect includes the second special aspect (for example, reach notice (high)) suggesting that the proportion is high, and the specific aspect includes the first specific aspect (for example, setting suggestion (low)) and the first specific aspect. The predetermined effect executing means includes the predetermined effect of the second special aspect and the specific aspect, including a second specific aspect (for example, setting suggestion (high)) that suggests the setting of a set value having a higher advantage than the aspect. When any of the predetermined effects of the aspect can be executed, the predetermined effect of the second special aspect is executed with priority over the predetermined effect of the specific aspect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is the effect control CPU 120 of the first embodiment). In the variable display effect determination process shown in FIG. 8-15, when the pattern PT-9 is won in the reach notice lottery, the 103SGS294 executes the reach notice (high) based on the pattern PT-9, and the pattern PT-1 to 1 to A part that is determined prior to the setting suggestion based on any of the patterns PT-7), the specific aspect when both the predetermined effect of the first special aspect and the predetermined effect of the specific aspect can be executed. Can be executed with priority over the predetermined effect of the first special aspect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is the diagram of the first embodiment). In the variable display effect determination process shown in 8-15, when any one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 is won in the lottery for suggesting the setting, the setting based on any of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 is set in 103SGS298. The part in which the execution of the suggestion (high) is prioritized over the reach notice (low) based on the pattern PT-8), and the first state (for example, the open state) and the game medium win the prize over the first state. The game medium includes at least a variable winning means (eg, a special variable winning ball device 151SG701 having a large winning opening) that can be changed to a difficult second state (eg, closed state), and the game medium responds to the winning of the game medium. The winning means to be given (for example, the first starting winning opening A, the first starting winning opening B, the second starting winning opening, the general winning opening 151SG010, the Fuden winning opening, the large winning opening) and the first gaming state (for example, , Low base state) and a second gaming state (for example, a high base state including a first high base state and a second high base state) that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state). The control means (for example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process processing) and the first number (for example, the value of the out number counter) which is the number of game media launched into the game area in the first game state. On the other hand, a calculation means capable of calculating the ratio of the second number (for example, the value of the prize ball number counter) which is the number of the given game media (for example, 151SGS292 of the base value calculation process shown in FIG. 9-27 by the CPU 103). The variable winning means is provided with a display means (for example, display monitor 151SG029) for displaying information (for example, a base value) regarding the ratio calculated by the calculation means. When controlled to a predetermined state (for example, a small hit game state) which is a state different from the state, it is controlled to the first state (for example, a portion where the big winning opening is opened during the small hit game), and the above. The calculation means is the number of game media given by the winning when the game medium wins the variable winning means that has changed to the first state based on being controlled to the predetermined state in the first gaming state. Is added to the second number (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-28 (A), when the variable display result is a small hit in the variable display of the first special symbol in the low base state, the variable display is used. The part that adds the number of prize balls given during the original small hit game to the prize ball counter) can be mentioned.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the enjoyment of the predetermined effect from being lowered by excessively restricting the execution of the predetermined effect of the specific mode. In addition, it is possible to display information regarding the ratio in consideration of the number of game media given by winning the variable winning means that has changed to the first state in the first gaming state.

In this way, the number of game media given by winning the variable winning means changed to the first state in the first game state (the number of prize balls given during the small hit game in the low base state) is taken into consideration. If the information regarding the ratio can be grasped in the game machine, the actual granting status of the game medium (ball output rate in the low base state) in the first game state of the game machine can be accurately grasped. In the setting work in the game machine that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player, the plurality of setting values are set in consideration of the actual granting status of the game medium in the first gaming state. Appropriate setting values can be set from among. That is, it is possible to prevent the setting value of the game medium in the first gaming state from being set to an inappropriate setting value based on the information deviating from the actual granting status.

Further, it is possible to prevent the entertainment of the predetermined effect from being lowered, and the ratio considering the number of game media given by winning the variable winning means changed to the first state in the first game state. As an example of the form of a gaming machine capable of displaying information about, a gaming medium (for example, a gaming ball) is launched into a gaming area (for example, left gaming area 151SG002L or right gaming area 151SG002R), and a game is performed in an advantageous state (for example). , A gaming machine that can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1), and a first state (for example, an open state) and a second state (for example, a game medium in which the game medium is more difficult to win than the first state). , Closed state) includes at least a variable winning means (for example, a special variable winning ball device 151SG701 having a large winning opening), and a winning means (for example,) in which the game medium is given according to the winning of the game medium. , 1st start winning opening A, 1st starting winning opening B, 2nd starting winning opening, general winning opening 151SG010, Fuden winning opening, large winning opening), 1st gaming state (for example, low base state), A gaming state control means (for example, CPU 103) that can control a second gaming state (for example, a high base state including a first high base state and a second high base state) that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state. The game given to the first number (for example, the value of the out number counter), which is the number of game media fired into the game area in the first game state (the part that executes the special symbol process process). A calculation means capable of calculating the ratio of the second number (for example, the value of the prize ball number counter) which is the number of media (for example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the process of 151SGS292 of the base value calculation process shown in FIGS. 9-27). And a display means (for example, display monitor 151SG029) for displaying information (for example, a base value) regarding the ratio calculated by the calculation means, and the variable winning means is in a state different from the advantageous state. When controlled to a predetermined state (for example, a small hit game state), the first state is controlled (for example, a portion where the big winning opening is opened during the small hit game), and the calculation means is the first state. When the gaming medium wins the variable winning means that has changed to the first state based on being controlled to the predetermined state in the gaming state, the number of the gaming media given by the winning is added to the second number. (For example, as shown in FIG. 9-28 (A), the variable display result is small in the variable display of the first special symbol in the low base state. In the case of a hit, a game machine (a part in which the number of prize balls given during the small hit game based on the variable display is added to the prize ball counter) can be mentioned. Hereinafter, an example of a form example of these game machines will be described as another form example.

Hereinafter, the feature portions of other morphological examples will be described.
(Explanation of feature section 151SG)
Next, the game machine in the feature unit 151SG of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-1 to 9-28.

First, FIG. 9-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in the feature unit 151SG, and shows the layout of the main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting the game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. The game board 2 is formed with a substantially circular game area surrounded by guide rails. A game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device into this game area.

In the feature unit 151SG, the game area is divided into a left game area 151SG002L on the left side and a right game area 151SG002R on the right side of the center decorative frame surrounding the image display device 5 arranged at a substantially central position of the game area. The (left-handed) game ball that was weakly launched by the hitting operation handle flowed down the left game area 151SG002L, and the (right-handed) game ball that was strongly launched by the hitting operation handle was above the center decorative pattern. It passes through the formed upper path 151SG002C and flows down the right game area 151SG002R.

Further, the general winning opening 151SG010 and the winning ball device 6A are arranged in the left game area 151SG002L, and the winning unit 151SG700 through which the game ball can pass is arranged in the right game area 151SG002R. Therefore, the game ball can win a prize in the first starting winning opening A formed by the general winning opening 151SG010 and the winning ball device 6A by flowing down the left game area 151SG002L, and flows down the right game area 151SG002R. The first start winning opening B, the second starting winning opening, the large winning opening, the passing gate, the Fuden winning opening, etc. (all of which will be described in detail later) can be won in the winning unit 151SG700. The game ball that has won the first start winning opening A in the feature unit 151SG is detected by the first starting opening A switch 151SG022A (see FIG. 9-11) and then guided to the back side of the game board 2 and discharged. Will be done. The game ball that has won the general winning opening 151SG010 is detected by the 7th count switch 151SG023G (see FIG. 9-11) and then guided to the back side of the game board 2 and discharged. Then, based on the detection of the game ball at the first start port A switch 151SG022A, the variable display of the first special symbol is executed.

In addition, a first out port into which a game ball flowing down the left game area 151SG002L and the right game area 151SG002R enters is formed below the winning ball device 6A in the feature unit 151SG, and enters the first out port. After being detected by the first out switch 151SG041A, the game ball is guided to the back side of the game board 2 and discharged.

As shown in FIGS. 9-2 to 9-5, the winning unit 151SG700 includes a front unit 151SG700A attached to the game board 2 from the front, and a rear unit 151SG700B attached to the game board 2 from the rear. It is mainly composed of.

As shown in FIG. 9-5, an opening 151SG700a is formed at the upper end of the winning unit 151SG700, and a game ball can enter the winning unit 151SG700 through the opening 151SG700a. Then, in the winning unit 151SG700, a first game ball flow path 151SG711 and a second game ball flow path 151SG712 are formed in which the game balls that have entered the winning unit 151SG700 from the opening 151SG700a can flow down.

A first branch portion 151SG711a at which the first branch path 151SG711b branches from the first game ball flow path 151SG711 is provided in the upstream portion of the first game ball flow path 151SG711, and is provided in the middle stream of the first game ball flow path 151SG711. The portion is provided with a second branch portion 151SG711c at which the second branch path 151SG711d branches from the first game ball flow path 151SG711. Further, a third branch portion 151SG711e at which the third branch path 151SG711f branches from the first game ball flow path 151SG711 is provided in the downstream portion of the first game ball flow path 151SG711.

A special variable winning ball device 151SG701 is provided at the lower part of the winning unit 151SG700. The special variable winning ball device 151SG701 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by driving a solenoid 151SG082 (see FIG. 9-11), and forms a large winning opening that changes between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening. To do. The large winning opening is formed so as to open upward at the lower part of the winning unit 151SG700. The large winning opening door can be slid back and forth between a closed position where the large winning opening is closed and an open position where the large winning opening is opened by driving the solenoid 151SG082.

In the special variable winning ball device 151SG701, when the solenoid 151SG082 is in the ON state, the large winning opening door opens the large winning opening, making it easier for the game ball to pass (enter) the large winning opening. On the other hand, when the solenoid 151SG082 is in the off state, the large winning opening door closes the first large winning opening, and the game ball cannot pass (enter) the first large winning opening. In this way, the first big winning opening changes into an open state that is advantageous for the player who can easily pass (enter) the game ball, and a closed state that is disadvantageous for the player because the game ball cannot pass (enter). In addition to the closed state in which the game ball cannot pass (enter) the large winning opening, or in addition to the closed state, a partially open state in which the game ball does not easily pass (enter) the large winning opening may be provided.

The game ball that has flowed down the first game ball flow path 151SG711 and the second game ball flow path 151SG712 to the special variable winning ball device 151SG701 passes through the large winning opening if the large winning opening is open. , If the big winning opening is closed, it flows down on the big winning opening door toward the first out opening. The game ball that has passed (entered) the large winning opening is detected by the first counting switch 151SG023A by passing through the first count switch 151SG023A provided in the large winning opening. The game ball that has passed through the first count switch 023A is detected by the second count switch 151SG023B or the third count switch 151SG023C, and then guided to the back side of the game board 2 and discharged.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-5, a communication port communicating with the first game ball flow path 151SG711 side and the out flow path 151SG714 side is formed below the general electric winning opening, and the first game A part of the game ball flowing down the ball flow path 151SG711 passes through the communication port and flows down toward the out flow path 151SG714.

The back side (rear unit 151SG700B) of the game board 2 in the feature unit 151SG is provided with the first link mechanism 151SG720 and the second link mechanism 151SG730, which will be described later, and the back side of the game board is used for out. There is not enough space to form road 151SG714. Therefore, the out flow path 151SG714 in the feature portion 151SG is formed on the front side (front unit 151SG700A) of the game board 2.

The first branch portion 151SG711a has a closed position in which the game ball is closed so that the game ball cannot enter the first branch path 151SG711b by driving the first link mechanism 151SG720 described later, and the game ball can enter the first branch path 151SG711b. A first swing member 151SG702 that can swing between the open position and the open position is provided. The closed position of the first swing member 151SG702 is a position of retracting from the first game ball flow path 151SG711 so as not to obstruct the game ball flowing down the first game ball flow path 151SG711, and the first swing member. The open position in 151SG702 is such that the game ball that flows down the first game ball flow path 151SG711 is received and the game ball is projected onto the first game ball flow path 151SG711 so that the game ball can be guided toward the first branch path 151SG711b. The position.

Further, in the second branch portion 151SG711c, the game ball can enter the second branch road 151SG711d and the closed position where the game ball is closed so as not to be able to enter the second branch road 151SG711d by the drive of the second link mechanism 151SG730 described later. A second swing member 151SG703 that can swing between the open position and the open position is provided. The closed position of the second swing member 151SG703 is a position of retracting from the first game ball flow path 151SG711 so as not to obstruct the game ball flowing down the first game ball flow path 151SG711, and the second swing member The open position in the 151SG703 means that the game ball that flows down the first game ball flow path 151SG711 is received and the game ball is projected onto the first game ball flow path 151SG711 so that the game ball can be guided toward the second branch path 151SG711d. The position.

Further, the third branch portion 151SG711e is provided with a slide member 151SG704 as an ordinary electric accessory. The slide member 151SG704 projects to the first game ball flow path 151SG711 by driving the solenoid 151SG081 (see FIG. 9-11) to receive the game ball and guide the game ball to the third branch path 151SG711f. , A retractable position that does not hinder the flow of the game ball in the first game ball flow path 151SG711 by retracting from the first game ball flow path 151SG711 is provided so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction. That is, the third branch road 151SG711f is in a state in which the game ball cannot enter or is difficult to enter when the slide member 151SG704 is in the retracted position, and the game ball enters when the slide member 151SG704 is in the protruding position. It is possible or easy to enter.

As described above, the game balls flowing down the first game ball flow path 151SG711 in the feature unit 151SG are from the first game ball flow path 151SG711 to the first branch path 151SG711b, the second branch path 151SG711d, and the third branch path 151SG711f. It is possible to enter either. Of these, the game ball that has entered the first branch road 151SG711b wins a prize in the first start winning opening B formed by the first branch road 151SG711b, and the first start opening B switch provided in the first branch road 151SG711b. Detected by 151SG022B. The game ball that has entered the second branch road 151SG711d wins a prize in the second start winning opening formed by the second branch road 151SG711d, and is detected by the second start opening switch 151SG022C provided in the second branch road 151SG711d. Will be done.

As a normal electric accessory in the feature unit 151SG, a form in which a slide member 151SG704 that slides in the front-rear direction at a retracted position and a protruding position is provided is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. There is no ordinary electric accessory in the first state (for example, the state in which the slide member 151SG704 is located in the retracted position) and the second state (for example, the state in which the slide member 151SG704 is located in the protruding position). If the third branch road 151SG711f can be changed into a state in which the game ball is difficult to enter and a state in which the game ball is easy to enter, for example, a lid that can open and close the third branch road 151SG711f by sliding movement or shaking. It may be a member (so-called electric tulip) or the like that can change the third branch road 151SG711f into a state in which the game ball is difficult to enter and a state in which it is easy to enter by moving.

As shown in FIG. 9-5, the game ball after being detected by the first start port B switch 151SG022B and the second start port switch 151SG022C has an out flow path 151SG714 provided on the right side of the winning unit 151SG700. Flow down. Then, the game ball flowing down the out flow path 151SG714 including the game ball flowing in from the first game ball flow path 151SG711 was formed at the lower end of the winning unit 151SG700 (the most downstream part of the out flow path 151SG714). By entering the second out port, it is detected by 151SG041B and then discharged toward the back side of the game board 2. Since the second out port of the feature unit 151SG is provided in the winning unit 151SG700 as shown in FIG. 9-5, the game ball flowing down the right game area 151SG002R (flowing down in the winning unit 151SG700). It is an out port that only the game ball) can enter.

That is, the second out switch 151SG041B can detect the game ball flowing down the out flow path 151SG714 after winning the first start winning opening B and the second starting winning opening, while the second out switch 151SG041B can detect the game ball flowing down the first starting winning opening A. The winning game ball cannot be detected.

Further, the game ball that has entered the third branch road 151SG711f wins a prize in the general electric winning opening formed by the third branch road 151SG711f, and is detected by the fourth count switch 151SG023D provided in the third branch road 151SG711f. Will be done. The game ball after being detected by the fourth count switch 151SG023D enters the back side of the game board 2 via the third branch path 151SG711f.

As shown in FIGS. 9-6 (A) and 9-6 (B), a fifth game ball can be detected on the back side of the game board 2 that can be entered via the third branch road 151SG711f. The count switch 151SG023E and the sixth count switch 151SG023F are arranged side by side on the left and right sides, and a distribution member 151SG025 is provided. The distribution member 151SG025 regulates the entry of the game ball into the sixth count switch 151SG023F (detection of the game ball by the sixth count switch 151SG023F) by moving left and right by driving the solenoid 151SG086 (see FIG. 9-11). At the same time, the first induction state that induces the entry into the fifth count switch 151SG023E (detection of the game ball by the fifth count switch 151SG023E) and the entry of the game ball into the fifth count switch 151SG023E (game by the fifth count switch 151SG023E). It is possible to change to a second induction state that regulates (detection of a ball) and induces an approach to the sixth count switch 151SG023F (detection of a game ball by the sixth count switch 151SG023F).

The game ball that has entered the fifth count switch 151SG023E from the third branch road 151SG711f (detected by the fifth count switch 151SG023E) is driven by driving the first link mechanism 151SG720 (see FIG. 9-8). The rocking member 151SG702 is moved from the closed position to the open position. The game ball after driving the first link mechanism 151SG720 is discharged by flowing down the back side of the game board 2, and the first link mechanism 151SG720 swings first based on the flow down of the game ball. The member 151SG702 is moved from the open position to the closed position.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 9-8 (A) and 9-8 (B), the first link mechanism 151SG720 is a mechanism built in the rear unit 151SG700B, and is mainly a first link member 151SG721. , The second link member 151SG722, the third link member 151SG723, the fourth link member 151SG724, and the fifth link member 151SG725.

Of these, the first link member 151SG721 is arranged below the fifth count switch 151SG023E, and one end on the front side is formed in a shape capable of receiving a game ball, and the other end on the rear side is the second link. It is interlockably connected to the lower end of the member 151SG722. Further, the first link member 151SG721 can swing in the vertical direction by a pivot axis facing the left-right direction (not shown).

The second link member 151SG722 is a rod-shaped member having an elongated length in the vertical direction, and is provided so as to be slidable in the vertical direction. Then, one end on the rear side of the third link member 151SG723 is interlockably connected to the upper end of the second link member 151SG722, and the other end on the front side of the third link member 151SG723 is connected to the other end of the fourth link member 151SG724. A fifth link member 151SG725 is interlockably connected to one end on the rear side and the other end on the front side of the fourth link member 151SG724.

Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 9-8 (A) and 9-8 (B), the first link member 151SG721 swings by receiving the game ball that has passed through the fifth count switch 151SG023E at one end (the other end). When the second link member 151SG722 slides upward due to the movement of the second link member 151SG722 upward, the third link member 151SG723 and the fourth link member are linked to the upward slide movement of the second link member 151SG722. 724, the fifth link member 151SG725 operates, and the operation of the fifth link member 151SG725 moves the first swing member 151SG702 from the closed position to the open position.

When the game ball flows down from one end of the first link member 151SG721, the second link member 151SG722 slides downward due to the restoring force of the spring 151SG726 provided between the rear unit 151SG700B and the second link member 151SG722. .. At this time, the third link member 151SG723, the fourth link member 724, and the fifth link member 151SG725 operate in conjunction with the downward sliding movement of the second link member 151SG722, and the operation of the fifth link member 151SG725 causes the fifth link member 151SG725. 1 The swing member 151SG702 moves from the open position to the closed position.

Further, the game ball that has entered the sixth count switch 151SG023F from the third branch path 151SG711f (detected by the sixth count switch 151SG023F) closes the second swing member 151SG703 by driving the second link mechanism 151SG730. Move from to the open position. The game ball after driving the second link mechanism 151SG730 is discharged by flowing down the back side of the game board 2, and the second link mechanism 151SG730 swings second based on the flow down of the game ball. The moving member 151SG703 is moved from the open position to the closed position.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 9-9 (A) and 9-9 (B), the second link mechanism 151SG730 is a mechanism built into the rear unit 151SG700B, and is mainly a first link member 151SG731. , The second link member 151SG732, the third link member 151SG733, the fourth link member 151SG734, and the fifth link member 151SG735.

Of these, the first link member 151SG731 is arranged below the fifth count switch 151SG023E, and one end on the front side is formed in a shape capable of receiving the game ball, and the other end on the rear side is the second link. It is interlockably connected to the lower end of the member 151SG732. Further, the first link member 151SG731 can swing in the vertical direction by a pivot axis facing the left-right direction (not shown).

The second link member 151SG732 is a rod-shaped member having an elongated length in the vertical direction, and is provided so as to be slidable in the vertical direction. Then, one end on the rear side of the third link member 151SG733 is interlockably connected to the upper end of the second link member 151SG732, and the other end on the front side of the third link member 151SG733 is connected to the other end of the fourth link member 151SG734. A fifth link member 151SG735 is interlockably connected to one end on the rear side and the other end on the front side of the fourth link member 151SG734.

Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 9-8 (A) and 9-8 (B), the first link member 151SG731 swings by receiving the game ball that has passed through the fifth count switch 151SG023E at one end (the other end). When the second link member 151SG732 slides upward due to the movement of the second link member 151SG732 upward, the third link member 151SG733 and the fourth link member are linked to the upward slide movement of the second link member 151SG732. 724, the fifth link member 151SG735 operates, and the operation of the fifth link member 151SG735 moves the first swing member 151SG702 from the closed position to the open position.

When the game ball flows down from one end of the first link member 151SG731, the second link member 151SG732 slides downward due to the restoring force of the spring 151SG736 provided between the rear unit 151SG700B and the second link member 151SG732. .. At this time, the third link member 151SG733, the fourth link member 734, and the fifth link member 151SG735 operate in conjunction with the downward sliding movement of the second link member 151SG732, and the operation of the fifth link member 151SG735 causes the fifth link member 151SG735. 1 The swing member 151SG702 moves from the open position to the closed position.

Returning to FIG. 9-5, a gate switch 151SG021 capable of detecting a game ball is provided between the second branch portion 151SG711c and the third branch portion 151SG711e in the first game ball flow path 151SG711. When the game ball is detected by the gate switch 151SG021 in the feature unit 151SG, the CPU 103 can execute the variable display of the normal symbol, and the variable display result of the normal symbol is derived and displayed in a winning combination. Based on this, the slide member 151SG704 described above operates in any of a plurality of operation patterns, and the distribution member 151SG025 operates in a specific operation pattern.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (A), the slide member 151S704 is driven by the solenoid 151SG081 to drive the operation patterns A to E based on the fact that the variable display result of the normal symbol is a hit. It works with either of. The slide member 151SG704 in the feature unit 151SG is arranged in the retracted position except when the slide member 151SG704 operates based on the result of the variable display of the normal symbol being hit.

The operation pattern A is an operation pattern in which the slide member 151SG704 is maintained in the protruding position for 16 ms and then moved to the retracted position based on the fact that the variable display result of the normal symbol is a hit. The operation pattern B is an operation pattern in which the slide member 151SG704 is maintained in the protruding position for 2000 ms and then moved to the retracted position based on the fact that the variable display result of the normal symbol is a hit. In the operation pattern C, the slide member 151SG704 is maintained in the protruding position for 16 ms, then maintained in the retracted position for 1000 ms, and maintained in the protruding position for 2000 ms based on the fact that the variable display result of the normal symbol is a hit. Finally, it is an operation pattern of moving to the retracted position. The operation pattern D maintains the slide member 151SG704 in the protruding position for 16 ms, then keeps it in the retracted position for 2000 ms, and keeps it in the protruding position for 2000 ms based on the fact that the variable display result of the normal symbol is a hit. Finally, it is an operation pattern of moving to the retracted position. Then, the operation pattern E is maintained in the retracted position for 5000 ms after the slide member 151SG704 is maintained in the protruding position for 16 ms based on the fact that the variable display result of the normal symbol is a hit, and the protruding position is maintained for 5000 ms. It is an operation pattern that keeps at and finally moves to the evacuation position.

On the other hand, the distribution member 151SG025 maintains the first induction state (see FIG. 9-6 (A)) for 4 ms based on the fact that the variable display result of the normal symbol is a hit, and then for 16 ms. The second lead state, the first lead state for 4996 ms, the second lead state for 5000 ms, respectively, are maintained, and the first lead state is reached.

As shown in FIG. 9-5, the game balls that have entered the third branch path 151SG711f by the slide member 151SG704 arranged at the protruding position are distributed by the distribution member 151SG025 after flowing down a predetermined distance. Therefore, when the operation patterns of the slide members are the operation patterns A to the operation pattern D, the game ball passes through the fifth count switch 151SG023E by reaching the distribution member 151SG025 which is the first induction state. It is distributed to. On the other hand, when the operation pattern of the slide member 151SG704 is the operation pattern E, the game ball is distributed so as to pass through the sixth count switch 151SG023F by reaching the distribution member 151SG025 which is the second induction state.

As described above, the game ball that has passed through the fifth count switch 151SG023E moves the first swing member 151SG702 from the closed position to the open position by operating the first link mechanism 151SG720, and passes through the sixth count switch 151SG023F. The game ball moves the second swing member 151SG703 from the closed position to the open position by operating the second link mechanism 151SG730. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (A), the distribution member 151SG025 has 4996 ms. When the game ball reaches the distribution member 151SG025 in the first induction state, the game ball can win a prize in the first starting winning opening B, and the distribution member 151SG025 is in the second induction state for 5000 ms. When the game ball reaches the distribution member 151SG025 at the time, the game ball can be won in the second start winning opening.

In the feature unit 151SG, the determination ratios of the operation patterns A to the operation patterns E of the slide member 151SG704 differ depending on the gaming state when the variable display result of the normal symbol is a hit. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (B), the gaming states in the feature unit 151SG include a low base state and a first high school with time reduction control except for the big hit game state and the small hit game state. A base state and a second high base state are provided. Of these, the first high base state and the second high base state are the high base states in the feature unit 151SG, but the determination ratios of the operation patterns A to E of the slide member 151SG704 are different.

Specifically, when the gaming state is the low base state (normal state), the operation pattern A is determined at a rate of 100% and the operation pattern B is determined at a rate of 0% as the operation pattern of the slide member 151SG704. The operation pattern C is determined at a rate of 0%, the operation pattern D is determined at a rate of 0%, and the operation pattern E is determined at a rate of 0%. When the gaming state is the first high base state, the motion pattern A is determined at a rate of 0%, the motion pattern B is determined at a rate of 50%, and the motion pattern B is determined at a rate of 20% as the motion pattern of the slide member 151SG704. The operation pattern C is determined, the operation pattern D is determined at a rate of 20%, and the operation pattern E is determined at a rate of 10%. When the gaming state is the second high base state, the motion pattern A is determined at a rate of 0%, the motion pattern B is determined at a rate of 0%, and the motion pattern B is determined at a rate of 0% as the motion pattern of the slide member 151SG704. The operation pattern C is determined, the operation pattern D is determined at a rate of 0%, and the operation pattern E is determined at a rate of 100%.

That is, the low base state in the feature unit 151SG means that the first starting winning opening A and the general winning opening can be won by launching the game ball into the left gaming area 151SG002L, as shown in FIG. 9-12 (A). The first high base state is a game state in which a game ball can be launched into the right game area 151SG022R to win a prize in the first start winning opening B and the general electric winning opening, and the second high base state. Is a gaming state in which a game ball can be launched into the right game area 151SG022R to win a prize in the first start winning opening B, the second starting winning opening, and the general electric winning opening. Whether the game state is the first high base state or the second high base state can be determined by whether or not the first high base state flag and the second high base state flag, which will be described later, are set. Good.

In addition, in this feature unit 151SG, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (B), when the gaming state is the low base state, the operation pattern E is not determined as the operation pattern of the slide member 151SG704, that is, the low base state. In the case where a normal figure hit occurs, even if the game ball wins the general electric winning opening, only the first starting winning opening B is opened, so that the variable display based on the starting winning to the first starting winning opening B The present invention exemplifies a form in which the probability that the result is a small hit is extremely low, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as an operation pattern of the slide member 151SG704 even when the gaming state is a low base state. A case may be provided in which the operation pattern E is determined. By doing so, if a hit with a normal figure occurs in a low base state, the second start winning opening may be opened by the game ball winning the general electric winning opening, so that the first starting winning opening B Since it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the variable display based on the start winning prize to the second start winning opening is a small hit rather than the variable display based on the start winning prize, the game interest can be improved.

Further, in the feature unit 151SG, as shown in FIG. 9-12 (B), when the game ball wins the first start winning opening A, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the game balls are paid out. If the player wins the first start winning opening B, one game ball is paid out as a prize ball, and if the game ball wins the second start winning opening, three game balls are paid out as a prize ball. If the game ball is issued and the game ball wins the big prize opening, 15 game balls are paid out as prize balls, and if the game ball wins the general prize opening, 3 game balls are paid as prize balls. When a game ball is put out and wins a prize in the Fuden winning opening, one game ball is paid out as a prize ball. Therefore, among the low base state, the first high base state, and the second high base state, the low base state in the feature unit 151SG is the game ball 100 launched more than the first high base state and the second high base state. This is a gaming state in which the ratio of the number of prize balls per ball (base value) is low. Specifically, the base value in the low base state is set to 0.35 (35%), and the base value in the first high base state and the second high base state is set to 0.9 (90%).

In the feature unit 151SG, the base value in the low base state is set to 0.35, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the base value in the low base state is the first high base state or the second high. Any value (for example, 0.4, 0.2, etc.) may be set as long as it is lower than the base state.

Further, in the present feature unit 151SG, the base value in the first high base state and the second high base state is set to 0.9, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first high base state and the second Even if the base value in the high base state is set to an arbitrary value (for example, 0.8, 0.7, 0.6, etc.) as long as it is higher than the base value in the low base state within a range not exceeding 1. Good.

As shown in FIG. 9-5, on the left side of the winning unit 151SG700, a third game ball flow in which a game ball that wants to enter the first game ball flow path 151SG711 or the second game ball flow path 151SG712 flows down. Road 151SG713 is formed. The game ball flowing down the third game ball flow path 151SG713 enters the third out opening without winning the first start winning opening B, the second starting winning opening, the Fuden winning opening, the large winning opening, etc. Then, after being detected by the third out switch 151SG041C, it is guided to the back side of the game board 2 and discharged.

As described above, in the pachinko game machine 1 in the feature unit 151SG, as shown in FIG. 9-10, the game ball winning the first start winning opening A is detected only by the first starting opening A switch 151SG022A. The game ball winning the first start winning opening B is detected by the first starting opening B switch 151SG022B and then detected by the second out switch 151SG041B. Further, the game ball that wins the second start winning opening is detected by the second starting opening switch 151SG022C and then detected by the second out switch 151SG041B.

Further, the game ball that wins the big prize opening is detected by the second count switch 151SG023B or the third count switch 151SG023C after being detected by the first count switch 151SG023A, and is detected by the general electric winning opening. The winning game ball is detected by the 5th count switch 151SG023E or the 6th count switch 151SG023F after being detected by the 4th count switch 151SG023D, and the game ball winning the general winning opening 151SG010 is It is detected by the 7th count switch 151SG023G.

In the special variable winning ball device 151SG701 of the feature unit 151SG, the game balls detected by the first count switch 151SG023A by driving a solenoid (not shown) are distributed to the second count switch 151SG023B and the third count switch 151SG023C. A distribution member is provided. The distribution member operates so as to distribute the game ball toward the second count switch 151SG023B only for a specific period during the small hit game. Therefore, during the small hit game in the feature unit 151SG, even if the game balls win the big winning opening, these game balls are not necessarily detected by the second count switch 151SG023B.

Then, the game ball entering the first out port is detected by the first out switch 151SG041A, and the game ball entering the second out port is detected by the second out switch 151SG041B. The game ball entering the third out port is detected by the third out switch 151SG041C.

Next, the configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 151SG will be described. First, as shown in FIG. 9-11, the switch circuit 110 mounted on the main board 11 includes the gate switch 151SG021, the first start port A switch 151SG022A, the first start port B switch 151SG022B, and the second start. Mouth switch 151SG022C, 1st count switch 151SG23A, 2nd count switch 151SG23B, 3rd count switch 151SG023C, 4th count switch 151SG023D, 5th count switch 151SG023E, 6th count switch 151SG023F, 7th count switch 151SG023G, 1st out switch 151SG041A, the second out switch 151SG041B, and the third out switch 151SG041C are connected.

Further, the solenoid 151SG082, the solenoid 151SG081, and the solenoid 151SG086 described above are connected to the solenoid circuit 111, respectively.

As shown in FIGS. 9-11 and 9-13, the main board 11 in the feature portion 151SG is housed in the board case 151SG201 which is configured to be openable by the first member and the second member, and is a pachinko game. It is mounted on the back of the machine 1. A display monitor 151SG029 capable of displaying a base value described later is arranged on the board case 151SG201. The display monitor 151SG029 is connected to the main board 11 and is arranged on the upper part of the board case 151SG201. That is, the display monitor 151SG029 is arranged in front of the main board 11 in the board case 151SG201 when the main board 11 is visually recognized. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized when the gaming machine frame 3 is not opened, the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized is the back surface side of the gaming board 2 when the gaming machine frame 3 is opened. This is the front when visually recognizing, and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized and the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

As shown in FIG. 9-14, the display monitor 151SG029 includes a first display unit 151SG029A, a second display unit 151SG029B, a third display unit 151SG029C, and a fourth display unit 151SG029D. The first display unit 151SG029A to the fourth display unit 151SG29D are each composed of seven segments composed of seven segments drawing the character "8" and dots arranged on the lower right side of the seven segments. The display control of the display monitor 151SG029 in the feature unit 151SG is executed by using the area not subject to the test in the entire area of the ROM 101 and the RAM 102 at the time of the test of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The display monitor 151SG029 in the feature unit 151SG can display the base value in the low base state calculated in the base value calculation process described later.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-1 and 9-11, the predetermined position of the game board 2 of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, the left position of the game area) in the feature unit 151SG is set to the position of the first special figure. The first special symbol display device 151SG004A capable of executing variable display, the second special symbol display device 151SG004B capable of executing variable display of the second special symbol, the first reserved indicator 151SG025A capable of displaying the first reserved storage number, the first 2 The second hold display 151SG025B capable of displaying the number of hold storages, the normal symbol display 151SG020 capable of executing variable display of normal symbols, the normal figure hold display 151SG025C capable of displaying the number of normal symbols held, etc. The game information display unit 151SG200 is provided.

FIG. 9-15 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in the feature unit 151SG in the present embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is set to "0". The command form shown in FIG. 9-15 (A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or a plurality of three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 9-15 (A), the command 8001H is a first variable display start command for designating the start of the variable display in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 151SG004A. .. The command 8002H is a second variable display start command for designating the start of the variable display in the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 151SG004B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. This is a fluctuation pattern specification command that specifies a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) such as a symbol. Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the content of instruction by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern to be specified.

The command 8CXXXH is a variable display result notification command, and is an effect control command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 9-15 (B), the determination result (predetermined result) of whether the variable display result is "missing", "big hit", or "small hit". ) Or, different EXT data are set according to the determination result (big hit type determination result) of which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is to be used when the variable display result is "big hit".

In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 9-15 (B), the command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command indicating a predetermined result indicating that the variable display result is “missing”. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit A" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit B" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit C" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit D" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C05H is a sixth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "small hit" and the big hit type is "small hit A" and the small hit type determination result. The command 8C06H is a seventh variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "small hit" and the big hit type is "small hit B" and the small hit type determination result.

The command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command for designating the change stop (confirmation) of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a game state designation command for designating the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, different EXT data are set according to, for example, the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a specific example, the command 9500H is the first game state specification command corresponding to the game state (low base state, normal state) in which the time reduction control is not performed, and the command 9501H is the game state (high base state) in which the time reduction control is performed. , Time saving state) is used as the second game state specification command.

The command 96XXH is an error (abnormal) designation command that specifies the occurrence of an error (abnormality) and the type of the error (abnormality) that has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the error (abnormality) designation command, for example, by setting the EXT data corresponding to each error (abnormality), it is specified which error (abnormality) has been determined on the effect control board 12 side. The occurrence of the specified error (abnormality) can be notified by the error notification process described later.

The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as a "fanfare command") for designating the display of an effect image indicating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state. The command A1XXH is a notification command during the opening of the big winning opening that notifies that the big winning opening is in the open state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after opening the big winning opening that notifies that the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit game state or the small hit game state.

In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determination result and the jackpot type determination result, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result notification command. .. Alternatively, in the hit start designation command or the hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result notification command. .. In the notification command while the big winning opening is open and the notification command after opening the big winning opening, different EXT data is set according to the number of rounds executed (for example, "1" to "15") in the big hit game state or the small hit game state. Will be done.

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the starting winning (first starting winning) is generated. This is a first start winning opening winning designation command for notifying that the first starting condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 151SG004A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) is generated. , The second start winning opening winning designation command for notifying that the second starting condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 151SG004B is satisfied.

The command C1XXH is a first hold storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure hold storage number in order to display the special figure hold storage number identifiable on the image display device 5 or the like. The command C2XXH is a second reserved storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure reserved storage number in order to display the special figure reserved storage number identifiable on the image display device 5 or the like. The first hold memory number notification command is, for example, when the first start winning opening winning designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first starting winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied. Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The second hold memory number notification command is, for example, when the second start winning opening winning designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied. Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In addition, the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command are used in the special figure game when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the hold storage number decreases). It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

Instead of the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command, the total hold storage number notification command for notifying the total hold storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total hold storage number notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) of the total hold storage number.

The command D0XXH is a V winning notification designation command for notifying that the second count switch 151SG023B is turned on when the game ball passes through the third count switch 24B.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which is a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing game control programs, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. The RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides the area, the CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes the game control program to perform the control operation, and the numerical data indicating the random value are updated independently of the CPU 103. It is configured to include a random number circuit 104 to perform, an I / O (Input / Output port) 105, and a real-time clock (RTC) 106 capable of outputting time information.

As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 is executed by executing the program read from the ROM 101 by the CPU 103. At this time, a fixed data read operation in which the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, a variable data writing operation in which the CPU 103 writes various variable data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores them, and various variable data temporarily stored in the RAM 102 by the CPU 103. The variable data read operation, the CPU 103 receives input of various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, and the CPU 103 goes to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105. A transmission operation that outputs various signals is also performed.

FIG. 9-16 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value counted on the side of the main board 11. As shown in FIG. 9-16, in the feature unit 151SG of this embodiment, in addition to the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the fluctuation pattern on the main board 11 side. Numerical data indicating each of the random value MR3 for determination, the random value MR4 for determining the normal map display result, and the random value MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 is controlled so as to be countable. In addition, random values other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. These random number values MR1 to MR5 may be counted by software update using different random counters in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

FIG. 9-17 shows the fluctuation pattern in the present embodiment. In the feature unit 151SG, among the cases where the variable display result is "off", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is variable according to each of the case of "non-reach" and the case of "reach". A plurality of fluctuation patterns are prepared in advance in response to a case where the display result is a "big hit". Further, 1 variation pattern is prepared in advance in response to a case where the variable display result is a “small hit”. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off" and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern"). The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "out of reach" and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is "reach" is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "out of reach variation pattern"). Further, the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern are included in the missed fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “off”. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "big hit" is called a big hit fluctuation pattern. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "small hit" is called a small hit fluctuation pattern.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the super reach such as super reach α and super reach β is executed. Although the feature unit 151SG provides only one type of normal reach fluctuation pattern, the present invention is not limited to this, and like the super reach, the normal reach α, the normal reach β, ... A plurality of normal reach fluctuation patterns may be provided. Further, as for the super reach fluctuation pattern, three or more super reach fluctuation patterns such as super reach γ may be provided in addition to the super reach α and the super reach β.

As shown in FIG. 9-17, the special figure fluctuation time of the normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed in the feature unit 151SG is set shorter than the super reach fluctuation patterns Super Reach α and Super Reach β. Has been done. Further, regarding the special figure fluctuation time of the super reach fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect such as super reach α and super reach β in the present embodiment is executed, the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect of super reach β is executed is In this case, the special figure fluctuation time is set longer than the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect of the super reach α is executed.

In this feature unit 151SG, as described above, the variable display result is set to be "big hit" in the order of super reach β, super reach α, and normal reach, so that the big hit expectation is set to be high. In the super reach fluctuation pattern, the longer the fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of a big hit.

In the feature unit 151SG, as will be described later, these fluctuation patterns are determined first, such as non-reach type, normal reach type, super reach type, and the like. Then, instead of determining the variation pattern to be executed from the variation pattern belonging to the determined type, the determination is made using only the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random value for determining the variation pattern type is provided for determining the variation pattern type. The type of the variation pattern may be determined first from the random value of the above, and then the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the variation pattern belonging to the determined type.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-17, the feature unit 151SG exemplifies a mode in which the fluctuation content (effect content) is predetermined for each fluctuation pattern, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the fluctuation content (effect content) may be different even if the fluctuation pattern is the same, depending on the set value. For example, in the case of the fluctuation pattern PA2-1 out of normal reach, if the set value is 1, the fluctuation pattern is out of normal reach, and if the set value is 2, a pseudo-continuous effect is performed. As a fluctuation pattern that is executed twice and becomes non-reach out of reach, when the set value is 3, the pseudo-continuous effect may be executed three times to make a fluctuation pattern that is out of super reach.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes the program read from the ROM 101, and by using the RAM 102 as the work area, various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are executed. Further, the CPU 103 can generate all of the various random numbers used on the side of the main board 11 by executing the random number generation program.

The ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data and the like used for controlling the progress of the game in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data that constitutes a plurality of determination tables shown in FIGS. 9-18 and the like, which are prepared for the CPU 103 to perform various determinations and determinations. Further, the ROM 101 includes table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, and a variation mode of each symbol in variable display such as a special symbol or a normal symbol. A fluctuation pattern table or the like that stores a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is stored.

The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, the display result determination table shown in FIG. 9-18 (A), the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) shown in FIG. 9-18 (B), and FIG. 9-18 ( Big hit type judgment table shown in C) (for the second special symbol) In addition to the small hit type judgment table shown in FIG. 9-18 (D) (common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol), the jackpot fluctuation pattern judgment table, It includes a small hit variation pattern determination table, an outlier variation pattern determination table, a general map display result determination table (not shown), a general map variation pattern determination table (not shown), and the like.

FIG. 9-18 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with the MR1 is set. In the display result determination table, the variable special figure designation buffer is 1 (first), that is, the first special symbol is the target of variable display and the variable special figure designation buffer is 2 (second). That is, for each of the cases where the second special symbol is the target of the variable display, a judgment value for a big hit and a judgment value for a small hit are set.

As shown in FIG. 9-18 (A), when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the big hit is won at the rate of 1/200 and the small hit is won at the rate of 1/200. The judgment value is set. On the other hand, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the determination value is set so that the big hit is won at a rate of 1/200 and the small hit is won at a rate of 1/6.

In the feature unit 151SG, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the variable display result is a big hit or a small hit by using the display result determination table shown in FIG. 9-18 (A). A big hit judgment table and a small hit judgment table are provided separately, and the big hit judgment can be made depending on whether the first special symbol is variably displayed or the second special symbol is variably displayed regardless of the variable special symbol designation buffer. A common table may be used, and the small hit determination may be performed using separate tables depending on whether the variable special figure designation buffer is the first or the second.

In the jackpot type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol, the jackpot type is selected from jackpot A to jackpot D based on the random number (MR2) for determining the jackpot type. It is a table referenced to determine. In addition, in this feature unit 151SG, as shown in FIGS. 9-18 (B) and 9-18 (C), the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) shows 3 from jackpot A to jackpot C. While the jackpots of different types are provided, the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) is provided with only one type of jackpot D. That is, the jackpot that occurs when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed is one of the three types of jackpots from the jackpot A to the jackpot C, while the variable display of the second special symbol is performed. Only the jackpot D is the jackpot that occurs in.

FIG. 9-18 (D) is an explanatory diagram showing a small hit type determination table stored in the ROM 101. In the small hit type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a small hit symbol, the small hit type is set to small hit A or small hit B based on the random number (MR2) for determining the hit type. It is a table referenced to determine. In this feature unit 151SG, when the game ball passes through the second count switch 151SG023B during the small hit game of the small hit A, that is, when the V winning big hit occurs, the big hit game of the big hit type E is executed. When the game ball passes through the second count switch 151SG023B during the small hit game of the small hit B, that is, when the V winning big hit occurs, the big hit game of the big hit type F is executed. It is supposed to be done. That is, these jackpots E and jackpot F are not the jackpot types determined by the random value MR2 for determining the hit type extracted at the time of starting winning, but the game balls during the small hit game of either the small hit A or the small hit B. Is a jackpot type determined by whether or not has passed the second count switch 151SG023B.

Here, the jackpot type in the feature unit 151SG will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-19 (A) and 9-19 (B). In this feature unit 151SG, as the jackpot type, the jackpot A in which the gaming state shifts to the low base state after the end of the jackpot gaming state and the jackpot B in which the gaming state shifts to the first high base state after the jackpot gaming state ends. , The jackpot C to the jackpot F in which the gaming state shifts to the second high base state after the end of the jackpot gaming state are provided.

Of these jackpots A to jackpot F, jackpots A to jackpot C are jackpots that are repeatedly executed four times (so-called four rounds) in which the jackpot is changed to a second state that is advantageous to the player.

The jackpot D is a jackpot that is repeatedly executed 15 rounds (so-called 15 rounds) that change the jackpot into a second state that is advantageous to the player, and the jackpot E is that the jackpot is advantageous to the player. The round that changes to the second state is 9 times (so-called 9 rounds), which is a big hit that is repeatedly executed, and the big hit F is 14 rounds that change the big winning opening to the second state that is advantageous to the player (so-called 14). Round), a big hit that is repeatedly executed.

In addition, the first high base state that shifts after the jackpot game of jackpot B ends is until the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are executed 100 times in total, or the first special symbol. The time saving control is executed until a big hit occurs before the variable display and the variable display of the second special symbol are executed 100 times in total. Then, in the second high base state that shifts after the jackpot game of jackpot C to jackpot F is completed, until the variable display of the first special symbol is executed 100 times and the variable display of the second special symbol is executed 10 times. , The variable display of the second special symbol until the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are executed 100 times in total, or until the variable display of the first special symbol is executed 100 times. Is executed 10 times, and the time saving control is performed until a big hit occurs before any of the conditions until either the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are executed 100 times in total is satisfied. Will be executed.

At the end of the big hit game of the big hit B, the CPU 103 sets the first high base state flag indicating that the game state is the first high base state together with the time saving flag in the big hit end process (S117). Further, at the end of the big hit game of the big hit C to the big hit F, the CPU 103 sets the second high base state flag indicating that the game state is the second high base state together with the time saving flag in the big hit end process (117). By doing so, the CPU 103 determines the operation pattern of the slide member 151SG704 at the time of hitting the normal drawing at different ratios in the three gaming states of the low base state, the first high base state, and the second high base state. Is possible (see FIG. 9-7 (B)).

As described above, the first high base state is a game state in which a game ball can be launched into the right game area 151SG022R to win a prize in the first start winning opening B and the Fuden winning opening, and is referred to as the second high base state. Is a gaming state in which a game ball can be launched into the right game area 151SG022R to win a prize in the first start winning opening B, the second starting winning opening, and the general electric winning opening.

In the high base state, the probability of hitting the normal figure increases, so that the slide member 151SG704 is more likely to protrude from the retracted position to the protruding position than in the normal state (low base state). The first start winning opening B and the second starting winning opening are opened by the game ball that has won the prize, and it becomes easy to win the first starting winning opening B and the second starting winning opening of the game ball. In particular, in the second high base state, the variable display result of the second special symbol becomes a small hit at a higher rate than the variable display result of the first special symbol because the second start winning opening is frequently opened. For this reason, in the second high base state, the big hit is generated by the game ball winning a V during the small hit game, so that the big hit game state is likely to occur continuously without going through the normal state. It becomes a state.

In the feature unit 151SG, six types of jackpots A to F are provided as jackpot types, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot types provided are 7 or more and 5 or less. May be good.

Further, in the present feature unit 151SG, as shown in FIG. 9-19 (B), in the second high base state, the variable display of the first special symbol is executed 100 times except that a big hit occurs. , Based on the fact that the variable display of the second special symbol is executed 10 times, or the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are executed 100 times in total. The form of ending (the game state shifts to the low base state) is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the second high base state is, for example, a variable display of the second special symbol. Is executed 100 times, the game shifts to the low base state, that is, the second high base state may continue until the next big hit (including the big hit via the small hit) occurs.

Further, in the present feature unit 151SG, when the gaming state is the first high base state or the second high base state, the mode in which the gaming state shifts to the low base state is illustrated on the condition that the number of variable display times of the special symbol is changed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the gaming state is the first high base state or the second high base state, the number of times the variable display result is a small hit is a predetermined number of times (for example, 10). The gaming state may shift to the low base state on condition that the number of times) is reached. As shown in FIG. 9-18 (A), in the feature unit 151SG, the variable display of the second special symbol is set to have a higher small hit probability than the variable display of the first special symbol. When the game state is the first high base state or the second high base state, the game state is low base on condition that the number of times the variable display result of the second special symbol is a small hit reaches a predetermined number of times. You may move to the state.

Next, the operation of the CPU 103 in the feature unit 151SG will be described. In the game control timer interrupt processing in the feature unit 151SG, as shown in FIG. 9-20, the CPU 103 performs the switch processing, the main side error processing, the information output processing, the game random number update processing, and the special symbol shown in S21 to S27. After executing the process process, normal symbol process process, and command control process, the base value calculation process (151SG028) for calculating the base value and the prize ball (game ball) based on the game ball winning in each winning opening. ) Is executed to pay out the prize ball (151SG029), and the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

The RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 9-11 may be a backup RAM in which a part or all of the RAM 102 is backed up by a backup power source created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 are stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied with power). To. In particular, at least the data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (such as the special figure process flag) and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data according to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for recovering the control state before the occurrence of the power failure or the like based on the data when the data is restored after the power failure or the like occurs. Further, the data corresponding to the control state and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as the data indicating the progress state of the game.

Such a RAM 102 is provided with a game control data holding area (not shown) as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The game control data holding area includes a first special figure holding storage unit, a second special figure holding storage unit, a normal drawing holding storage unit, a game control flag setting unit, a game control timer setting unit, and a game control counter. It has a setting unit and a game control buffer setting unit.

The first special figure reservation storage unit is a special figure game (first special symbol display) in which a game ball passes (enters) through the first start winning opening and a start winning (first starting winning) occurs but has not yet started. The reserved data of the special figure game) using the first special figure in the apparatus 151SG004A is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit associates the winning order (detection order of game balls) with the holding number with the first starting winning opening, and satisfies the first starting condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, which are extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on , Store until the number of stored items reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The hold data stored in the first special figure hold storage unit in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game. ) Will be the pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit.

The second special figure hold storage unit is a special figure game (second special symbol display) in which the game ball passes (enters) through the second start winning opening and a start winning (second starting winning) occurs but has not yet started. The reserved data of the special figure game) using the second special figure in the device 151SG004B is stored. As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit associates the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball) with the holding number with the second starting winning opening, and satisfies the second starting condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, etc. extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on , Store until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The hold data stored in the second special figure hold storage unit in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game. ) Will be the pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit.

It should be noted that the hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first start condition due to the game ball passing (entering) through the first start winning opening and the game ball passing (entering) through the second start winning opening. The hold information (second hold information) based on the establishment of the second start winning prize may be stored in association with the hold number in the common hold storage unit. In this case, the start port data indicating which of the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening the game ball has passed (entered) may be included in the hold information and stored in association with the hold number. ..

The normal figure hold storage unit stores the hold information of the normal figure game that has not yet been started by the normal symbol display 151SG020 even though the game ball that has passed through the passing gate is detected by the gate switch 151SG021. For example, the normal map hold storage unit associates the game balls with the hold numbers in the order in which they pass through the passing gate, and is used for determining the normal figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the passing of the game balls. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 is stored as reserved data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”).

The game control flag setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of flags that can update the state according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit stores data indicating count values for each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 154 may be provided with a random counter for the CPU 103 to count a part or all of the game random numbers so that they can be updated by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit, random number values not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating random number values MR1 to MR4 are stored as random count values, and are periodically executed according to the execution of software by the CPU 103. Numerical data indicating each random number value is updated targetly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the operation of updating the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be extracted from the random number circuit 104. It may be for updating the random count value by performing a predetermined process such as scramble processing or arithmetic processing on all or a part of the numerical data.

The game control buffer setting unit is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

FIG. 9-21 is a flowchart showing a special symbol normal process (S110) executed by the CPU 103. In the special symbol normal processing, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the second special symbol hold storage number is "0" (151SGS141). The second special figure reservation number is the number of reservations of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 151SG004B.

When the number of the second special figure hold storage is other than "0" in 151SGS141 (151SGS141; N), the hold data stored in the second special figure hold storage unit corresponding to the hold number "1" is set. Numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are read out (151SGS142). The numerical data read at this time may be stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation and temporarily stored.

Following the processing of 151SGS142, the second special figure holding memory number and the total holding storage number are subtracted by 1 by subtracting 1 from the second special figure holding storage number count value and the total holding storage number count value and updating. The data in the second special figure reservation storage unit is updated as well as the above. Specifically, the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the hold number "1" (for example, the entries corresponding to the hold numbers "2" to "4") in the second special figure hold storage unit 151B are stored. The indicated pending data is shifted upward one entry at a time (S143).

After that, after updating the variable special figure designated buffer value, which is the stored value of the variable special figure designated buffer, to "2" (151SGS144), the process shifts to 151SGS149.

On the other hand, when the second special figure reserved storage number is "0" in 151SGS141 (151SGS141; Y), it is determined whether or not the first special figure reserved storage number is "0" (151SGS145). The first special figure reservation number is the number of reservations of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 151SG004A. For example, in the process of 151SGS145, the game control counter setting unit may read the first hold storage count value stored in the first hold storage counter, and determine whether or not the read value is "0". .. As described above, the process of 151SGS145 is executed when the second special figure reserved storage number is determined to be "0" by 151SGS141, and whether or not the first special figure reserved storage number is "0". Is determined. As a result, the special figure game using the second special figure is started to be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure.

It should be noted that the special figure game using the second special figure is not limited to the one that is executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure, for example, the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening. The execution of the special figure game may be started in the order in which the game balls enter (pass) and the start prize is generated. In this case, a table for storing data that can specify the order in which the start winnings are generated is provided, and execution of the special figure game using either the first special figure or the second special figure is started from the stored data. I just need to be able to decide.

When the number of 1st special figure hold storage is other than "0" in 151SGS145 (151SGS145; N), the hold data stored in the 1st special figure hold storage unit corresponding to the hold number "1" is set. Numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are read out (151SGS146). The numerical data read at this time may be stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation and temporarily stored.

Following the processing of 151SGS146, the first special figure holding memory number and the total holding storage number are subtracted by 1 by subtracting 1 from the first special figure holding storage number count value and the total holding storage number count value and updating. And update the data in the 1st special figure reservation storage unit. Specifically, the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the hold number "1" (for example, the entries corresponding to the hold numbers "2" to "4") in the first special figure hold storage unit are shown. The pending data is shifted up one entry at a time (151SGS147).

After that, after updating the variable special figure designation buffer value which is the stored value of the variable special figure designated buffer to "1" (151SGS148), the process shifts to 151SGS149.

In 151SGS149, FIG. 9-18 (A) is used as a table for determining whether the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol, is "big hit", "small hit", or "missing". Select and set the display result judgment table shown in. Subsequently, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result stored in the random number buffer for fluctuation is assigned to each special figure display result of "big hit", "small hit", and "missing". Compared with the value, it is determined whether the special figure display result is "big hit", "small hit", or "missing" (151SGS150).

After the special figure display result is determined by the 151SGS150, it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is a "big hit" (151SGS151). Then, when it is determined to be a "big hit" (151SGS151; Y), the big hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit is set to the on state (151SGS152). At this time, as a table to be used for determining the jackpot type to one of a plurality of types, a jackpot type determination table corresponding to the variable special figure designation buffer is selected and set (151SGS153). At this time, when the value of the variable special figure designation buffer is "1", the CPU 103 selects and sets the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 9-18 (B), and sets the variable special figure. When the value of the figure designation buffer is "2", the jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 9-18 (C) may be selected and set. By referring to the jackpot type determination table set in this way, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination stored in the variable random number buffer is "big hit A" and "big hit B" in the jackpot type determination table. , "Big hit C" and "Big hit D", it is determined which of the plurality of types the big hit type is to be selected according to which of the determination values assigned to each big hit type is matched (151SGS154).

By determining the jackpot type in the processing of 151SGS154, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state can be determined as either a time saving state in which the time single output control (time saving control) is performed or a normal state in which the time saving control is not performed. It will be decided before the definite special symbol as the variable display result is derived whether to control the game state of. Corresponding to the jackpot type determined in this way, for example, by setting the jackpot type buffer value which is the stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit (151SGS155), the determined jackpot type is stored. Then proceed to 151SGS156. As an example, if the jackpot type is "big hit A", the jackpot type buffer value is set to "0", if it is "big hit B", it is set to "1", if it is "big hit C", it is set to "2", and "big hit D". If it is, it may be set to "3".

On the other hand, when it is determined by 151SGS151 that it is not a "big hit" (151SGS151; N), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the special figure display result is a "small hit" (151SGS151a). When it is determined to be a "small hit" (151SGS151a; Y), the small hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit is set to the on state (151SGS151b). At this time, a small hit type determination table (see FIG. 9-18 (D)) is selected and set as a table to be used for determining the small hit type to one of a plurality of types (151SGS151c). By referring to the small hit type determination table set in this way, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for the hit type determination stored in the variable random number buffer can be displayed in the small hit type determination table as "small hit A" and " It is determined which of the plurality of types the small hit type is to be used according to which of the determination values assigned to each small hit type of "small hit B" is matched (151SGS151d).

Corresponding to the small hit type determined in this way, for example, by setting the small hit type buffer value which is the stored value of the small hit type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit (151SGS151e), the determined small The hit type is memorized and the process proceeds to 151SGS156. As an example, if the small hit type is "small hit A", the small hit type buffer value may be set to "0", and if it is "small hit B", it may be set to "1".

In 151SGS156, the result of pre-determining whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state (whether or not the jackpot flag is set), the result of determining the jackpot type in the case of the jackpot gaming state, and further, the small hit gaming state. A fixed special symbol is set according to the pre-determined result of whether or not to control (whether or not the small hit flag is set). As an example, a special symbol indicating the "-" symbol, which is an outlier symbol, is set as the finalized special symbol in response to the pre-determined result that the special symbol display result is "out of place". Further, when the special figure display result is determined to be "big hit" in 151SGS151, the big hit symbols "1", "3", "5", depending on the determination result of the big hit type in 151SGS154, Any of the special symbols indicating the number "7" is set as the finalized special symbol. That is, a special symbol showing the number "1" is set as the finalized special symbol according to the determination result that the jackpot type is "big hit A". In addition, a special symbol indicating the number "3" is set as the finalized special symbol according to the determination result that the jackpot type is "big hit B". A special symbol showing the number "5" is set as a confirmed special symbol according to the determination result that the jackpot type is "big hit C". A special symbol showing the number "7" is set as a confirmed special symbol according to the determination result that the jackpot type is "big hit D". Further, in response to the pre-determined result that the special symbol display result is "small hit", the special symbol indicating the symbol "2" which is the small hit symbol is set as the finalized special symbol.

After the fixed special symbol is set in 151SGS156, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1" which is a value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern setting process (151SGS157), and then the special symbol normal processing is terminated.

If the reserved memory number of the special figure game using the first special figure is "0" in 151SGS145 (151SGS145; Y), after performing the predetermined demo display setting (151SGS158), the special symbol is normal. End the process. In this demo display setting, for example, an effect control command (customer waiting demo specification command) for designating a demonstration display (demo screen display) by displaying a predetermined effect image on the image display device 5 is produced from the main board 11. It is determined whether or not the transmission has been completed to the substrate 12. At this time, if the customer waiting demo designation command has already been sent, the demo display setting is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it has not been sent, the setting for sending the customer waiting demo specification command is made, and then the demo display setting is terminated.

9-22 and 9-23 are flowcharts showing the special symbol stop processing (S113) executed by the CPU 103. In the special symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 sets the end flag referred to in the special symbol variation processing of S32 to end the variation of the special symbol, and stops at the first special symbol display device 151SG004A and the second special symbol display device 151SG004B. Control is performed to derive and display a symbol (151SGS171). When the variable special symbol designation buffer value is "1" indicating the first special symbol, the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 151SG004A is terminated, and the variable special symbol designated buffer value. When is "2" indicating the second special symbol, the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 151SG004B is terminated. In addition, control is performed to transmit a symbol determination command to the effect control board 12 (151SGS172). Then, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is set (151SGS173), and if the jackpot flag is not set (151SGS173; N), the process proceeds to 151SGS180.

On the other hand, when the jackpot flag is set (151SGS173; Y), the CPU 103 clears these flags if the time saving flag, the first high base state flag, and the second high base state flag are set (151SG174). ), Hit start 1 designated command (big hit A), hit start 2 designated command (big hit B), hit start 3 designated command (big hit C) hit start 4 according to the type of jackpot stored in the effect control board 12. Make settings to send the designated command (big hit D) (151SGS175). The hit start designation command set in 151SGS175 is transmitted to the effect control board 12 by the command control process (S27) described above.

Further, the CPU 103 makes settings for transmitting a game state designation command indicating a normal state to the effect control board 12 (151SGS176).

Then, a value corresponding to the jackpot display time (time for notifying the occurrence of the jackpot, for example, in the image display device 5) is set in the jackpot display time timer (151SGS177). Further, the number of times of opening (for example, 4 times in the case of big hit A to C and 15 times in the case of big hit D) is set in the big winning opening opening number counter (151SGS178). Then, the values of the first special figure variable display count counter and the second special figure variable display count counter, which will be described later, are reset to 0 (151SGS179a), and the value of the separate symbol process flag corresponds to the jackpot opening preprocessing (S114). The value is updated to "4" (151SGS179b), and the special symbol stop process is terminated.

On the other hand, in 151SGS180, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the small hit flag is set. If the small hit flag is not set (151SGS180; N), the process proceeds to 151SGS198. On the other hand, when the small hit flag is set (151SGS180; Y), the CPU 103 receives a hit start 5 designation command (small hit A) or a hit on the effect control board 12 according to the type of small hit stored. Start 6 Make settings to send the designated command (small hit B) (151SGS181). The hit start designation command set in 151SGS181 is transmitted to the effect control board 12 by the command control process (S27) described above.

Then, a value corresponding to the small hit display time (time for notifying the occurrence of the small hit by, for example, the image display device 5) is set in the small hit display time timer (151SGS182). In addition, the number of times of opening (for example, 2 times in the case of a small hit) is set in the large winning opening opening number counter (151SGS183), and whether or not the time saving flag is set, that is, the high base state (first high base). It is determined whether or not a small hit is won in the state (or the second high base state) (151SGS184). When the time saving flag is not set, that is, when the small hit is won in the low base state (normal state) (151SGS184; N), the low base time small hit flag is set and the process proceeds to 151SGS186 (151SGS185). If the time saving flag is set, that is, if a small hit is won in the high base state (151SGS184; Y), the process proceeds to 151SGS186 without going through the processing of 151SGS185.

Then, the CPU 103 determines in the 151SGS186 whether or not the time saving flag is set, that is, whether or not the gaming state is the first high base state or the second high base state. If the time saving flag is not set (151SGS186; N), the process proceeds to 151SGS196, and if the time saving flag is set (151SGS186; Y), whether or not the value of the variable special map designation buffer is 1, that is, , It is determined whether or not the executed variable display is the variable display of the first special symbol (151SGS187). When the value of the variable special figure designation buffer is 1 (151SGS187; Y), the value of the 1st special figure variable display number counter indicating the variable display number of the 1st special symbol in the high base state is incremented by +1 to 151SGS190. Proceed (151SGS188). When the value of the variable special figure designation buffer is 2 (151SGS187; N), the value of the 2nd special figure variable display count counter indicating the variable display number of the 2nd special symbol in the high base state is incremented by 1. Proceed to 151 SGS 190 (151 SGS 189).

Next, in 151SGS190, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the sum of the value of the first special figure variable display number counter and the value of the second special figure variable display disclosure number counter is 100. When the sum of the value of the first special figure variable display count counter and the value of the second special figure variable display disclosure number counter is 99 or less (151SGS190; N), whether or not the gaming state is the first high base state. That is, it is determined whether or not the first high base state flag is set (151SGS191). When the gaming state is the second high base state (151SGS191; N), it is determined whether or not the value of the first special figure variable display number counter is 100 (151SGS192). When the value of the first special figure variable display number counter is 99 or less (151SGS191; N), it is determined whether or not the value of the second special figure variable display number counter is 10 (151SGS193). When the value of the second special figure variable display count counter is 9 or less (151SGS193; N), the process proceeds to 151SGS196.

Further, when the sum of the value of the first special figure variable display count counter and the value of the second special figure variable display disclosure number counter is 100 (151SGS190; Y), the gaming state is the first high base state (151SGS191). ; Y), when the value of the first special figure variable display count counter is 100 (191SGS192; Y), when the value of the second special figure variable display count counter is 10 (181SGS193; Y), the time saving flag, Clear the set flag of the 1st high base state flag and the 2nd high base state flag (151SGS194), and set the value of the 1st special figure variable display count counter and the value of the 2nd special figure variable display count counter to 0. Reset to 151SGS196 and proceed to 151SGS195 (151SGS195).

In 151SG161, the CPU 103 sets the transmission of the game state designation command corresponding to the set state of the time saving flag. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "8", which is a value corresponding to the small hit release pre-processing (S118), and the special symbol stop processing is terminated (151SGS197).

On the other hand, in 151SGS198, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the time saving flag is set, that is, whether or not the gaming state is the first high base state or the second high base state. If the time saving flag is not set (151SGS198; N), the process proceeds to 151SGS208, and if the time saving flag is set (151SGS198; Y), whether or not the value of the variable special diagram designation buffer is 1, that is, , It is determined whether or not the executed variable display is the variable display of the first special symbol (151SGS199). When the value of the variable special figure designation buffer is 1 (151SGS199; Y), the value of the 1st special figure variable display number counter indicating the variable display number of the 1st special symbol in the high base state is incremented by +1 to 151SGS202. Proceed (151 SGS200). When the value of the variable special figure designation buffer is 2 (151SGS199; N), the value of the 2nd special figure variable display number counter indicating the variable display number of the 2nd special symbol in the high base state is incremented by 1. Proceed to 151SGS202 (151SGS201).

Next, in 151SGS202, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the sum of the value of the first special figure variable display number counter and the value of the second special figure variable display disclosure number counter is 100. When the sum of the value of the first special figure variable display count counter and the value of the second special figure variable display disclosure number counter is 99 or less (151SGS202; N), whether or not the gaming state is the first high base state. That is, it is determined whether or not the first high base state flag is set (151SGS203). When the gaming state is the second high base state (151SGS203; N), it is determined whether or not the value of the first special figure variable display number counter is 100 (151SGS204). When the value of the first special figure variable display number counter is 99 or less (151SGS204; N), it is determined whether or not the value of the second special figure variable display number counter is 10 (151SGS205). When the value of the second special figure variable display count counter is 9 or less (151SGS205; N), the process proceeds to 151SGS208.

Further, when the sum of the value of the first special figure variable display count counter and the value of the second special figure variable display disclosure number counter is 100 (151SGS202; Y), the gaming state is the first high base state (151SGS203). ; Y), when the value of the first special figure variable display count counter is 100 (191SGS204; Y), and when the value of the second special figure variable display count counter is 10 (181SGS205; Y), the time saving flag, Clear the set flag of the 1st high base state flag and the 2nd high base state flag (151SGS206), and set the value of the 1st special figure variable display count counter and the value of the 2nd special figure variable display count counter to 0. Reset to 151SGS208 and proceed to 151SGS208 (151SGS207).

In 151SG208, the CPU 103 sets the transmission of the game state designation command corresponding to the set state of the time saving flag. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "0", which is a value corresponding to the small hit release pre-processing (S110), and the special symbol stop processing is terminated (151SGS209).

FIG. 9-24 is a flowchart showing the small hit opening pre-processing (S118) executed by the CPU 103. In the small hit release pre-processing, the CPU 103 first sets the small hit display time timer by -1 (151SGS211), and determines whether or not the small hit display time timer has timered out (151SGS212). If the small hit display time timer is not timered out (151SGS212; N), the small hit opening preprocessing is terminated, while if the small hit display time timer is timered out (151SGS212; Y), the big winning opening is opened. A value corresponding to a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) is set in the open time timer for setting the open state (151SGS213). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "9" (S204), which is a value corresponding to the small hit opening processing (S119), and the small hit opening pre-processing is terminated.

FIG. 9-25 is a flowchart showing the small hit opening processing (S119) executed by the CPU 103. In the small hit opening process, the CPU 103 first sets the value of the opening time timer to -1 (151SGS221). Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the open time timer has timed out (151SGS222).

If the open time timer is out of the timer (151SGS222; Y), it shifts to 151SGS235, and if the open time timer is not out of the timer (151SGS222; N), it is determined whether or not it is the opening timing of the big winning opening. (151SGS223). When the opening timing of the large winning opening is (151SGS223; Y), the CPU 103 controls the large winning opening to the open state by driving the solenoid 151SG082 for the large winning opening door (151SGS224). Then, the transmission setting of the designated command during the opening of the large winning opening is set (151SGS225), and the process shifts to 151SGS226. The command for designating the opening of the large winning opening, which is set to be transmitted in 151SGS225, is transmitted to the effect control board 12 by the command control process described above. If it is not the opening timing of the big winning opening (151SGS223; N), the process proceeds to 151SGS226 without going through 151SGS224 and 151SGS225.

In 151SGS226, the CPU 103 determines whether or not it is the closing timing of the big winning opening. When it is the closing timing of the big winning opening (151SGS226; Y), the CPU 103 controls the big winning opening to the closed state by driving the solenoid 151SG082 for the big winning opening door (151SGS227). Then, after opening the big winning opening, the transmission setting of the designated command is set (151SGS228), and the process proceeds to 151SGS229. The command for designating the opening of the winning opening, which is set to be transmitted in 151SGS228, is transmitted to the effect control board 12 by the command control process described above. If it is not the closing timing of the big winning opening (151SGS226; N), the process proceeds to 151SGS229 without going through 151SGS227 and 151SGS228.

In 151SGS229, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second count switch 151SG023B is turned on. If the second count switch 151SG023B is not turned on (151SGS229; N), the processing during small hit opening is completed, and if the second count switch 151SG023B is turned on (151SGS229; Y), the second count switch is already on. It is determined whether or not the count switch 151SG023B is turned on, that is, whether or not the V winning flag indicating that the game ball has passed through the second count switch 151SG023B is set (151SGS230). If the V winning flag is set (151SGS230; Y), the processing during small hit opening is completed, and if the V winning flag is not set (151SGS230; N), the V winning flag is set (151SGS231). ..

Then, the CPU 103 sets the transmission of the V winning notification command to the effect control board 12 (151SGS232). The V prize notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 in the command control process (S27) described above. Further, if the large winning opening is in the open state, the CPU 103 controls the large winning opening to be closed by driving the solenoid 151SG082 for the large winning opening door (151SGS233) and clears the opening time timer (151SGS234). ..

Then, in 151SGS235, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to "10", which is a value corresponding to the small hit end processing (S120), and ends the small hit opening process.

FIG. 9-26 is a flowchart showing the small hit end process (S120) executed by the CPU 103. In the small hit end process, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the small hit end display timer is operating (151SGS241). If the small hit end display timer is not operating (151SGS241; N), the small hit flag is cleared (151SGS242), and the effect control board 12 is set to send a hit end designation command according to the small hit (151SGS243). ). The hit end designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 in the command control process (S27) described above. Then, a value corresponding to the small hit end display time is set in the small hit end display timer (151SGS244), and the small hit end process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the small hit end display timer is operating (151SGS241; Y), the value of the small hit end display timer is set to -1 (151SGS245). Then, it is determined whether or not the small hit end display time has elapsed, that is, whether or not the small hit end display timer has timed out (151SGS246). If the small hit end display time has not elapsed (151SGS246; N), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second count switch 151SG023B is turned on (151SGS247). If the second count switch 151SG023B is not turned on (151SGS247; N), the small hit end processing is finished, and if the second count switch 151SG023B is turned on (151SGS247; Y), the second count is already done. It is determined whether or not the V winning flag indicating that the switch 151SG023B is turned on, that is, the game ball has passed the second count switch 151SG023B is set (151SGS248). If the V winning flag is set (151SGS248; Y), the small hit end process is completed, and if the V winning flag is not set (151SGS248; N), the V winning flag is set (151SGS249).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the transmission of the V winning notification command to the effect control board 12 (151SGS250). The V prize notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 in the command control process (S27) described above. Further, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the time saving flag is set (151SG251). When the time saving flag is set (151SGS251; Y), the small hit end processing is completed, and when the time saving flag is not set (151SG251; N), the low base time small hit flag is set and the small hit is set. The end process is terminated (151SGS252).

Further, when the small hit end display time has elapsed in 151SGS246 (151SGS246; Y), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the V winning flag is set (151SGS253). When the V winning flag is set (151SGS253; Y), the CPU 103 clears the V winning flag and sets the jackpot flag (151SGS254, 151SGS255). Then, the CPU 103 determines the jackpot type from "big hit E" and "big hit F" based on the small hit type in which the V prize is generated (151SGS256). As shown in FIG. 9-18 (D), when the small hit type in which the V prize is generated is "small hit A", the big hit type is determined to be "big hit E". When the small hit type in which the V prize is generated is "small hit B", the big hit type is determined to be "big hit F". Corresponding to the jackpot type determined in this way, for example, by setting the jackpot type buffer value which is the stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit (151SGS257), the determined jackpot type is stored. To do. As an example, if the jackpot type is "big hit E", the jackpot type buffer value may be set to "4", and if it is "big hit F", it may be set to "5".

After executing 151SGS257, the CPU 103 clears if the low base small hit flag is set (151SGS258). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4" (151SGS259), which is a value corresponding to the large hit opening pre-processing (S114), and the small hit end processing is terminated.

That is, in this feature unit 151SG, the game ball passes through the second count switch 151SF023B not only during the small hit game but also during the period until the small hit end display time elapses after the small hit game ends. Therefore, even if a game ball wins a prize in the large winning opening immediately before the end of the small hit game, the big hit game is executed after the small hit end process is completed by passing the game ball through the second count switch 151SG023B. It has become like.

If the V winning flag is not set in 151SGS253 (151SGS; N), the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to "0", which is a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (S110) (S110). 151SGS260), the small hit end process is completed.

9-27 is a flowchart showing the base value calculation process (151SGS028) shown in FIG. 9-20. In the base value calculation process, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the gaming state is the jackpot gaming state (151SGS261). When it is in the big hit game state (151SGS261; Y), the base value calculation process is completed, and when it is not in the big hit game state (151SGS261; N), it is further determined whether or not the game state is the small hit game state (151SGS262). ).

When the gaming state is not the small hit gaming state (151SGS262; N), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the gaming state is the low base state (normal state). When it is not in the low base state, that is, in the first high base state or the second high base state (151SGS263; N), the base value calculation process ends. Further, when the gaming state is the low base state (151SGS263; Y), whether or not the first starting port A switch 151SG022A is turned on, that is, the game ball wins the first starting winning opening A and is the first. It is determined whether or not it is detected by the start port A switch 151SG022A (151SGS264).

When the first start port A switch 151SG022A is turned on (151SGS264), the CPU 103 increases the value of the prize ball counter indicating the total number of prize balls paid out in the prize ball payout process by +3 and discharges the prize balls from the game board 2. The value of the out number counter indicating the number of game balls played is incremented by +1 to proceed to 151SGS267 (151SGS265, 151SGS266). When the first start port A switch is OFF (151SGS264; N), the process proceeds to 151SGS267 without executing the processes of 151SGS265 and 151SGS266.

In 151SGS267, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the first start port B switch 151SG022B is turned on, that is, whether or not the game ball has won the first start winning opening B and is detected by the first starting port B switch 151SG022B. judge. When the first start port B switch 151SG022B is turned ON (151SGS267; Y), the value of the prize ball counter is increased by +1 and the value of the out number counter is increased by +0 (151SGS268, 151SGS269). In addition, the value of the out number counter is increased to +0 (without adding the value of the out number counter), and the value of the remaining number counter indicating the number of game balls remaining in the winning unit 151SG700 is incremented by +1 to proceed to 151SGS274. (151SGS273, 151SG273a). When the second start port switch 151SG022C is OFF (151SGS267; N), the process proceeds to 151SGS274 without executing the processes of 151SGS272 and 151SGS273a.

In 151SGS274, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the fourth count switch 151SG023D is turned on, that is, whether or not the game ball has won the general electric winning opening and is detected by the fourth count switch 151SG023D. When the 4th count switch 151SG023D is turned ON (151SGS274; Y), the value of the prize ball counter is incremented by +1 to proceed to 151SGS276, and when the 4th count switch 151SG023D is OFF (151SFS274; N), 151SGS275 Proceed to 151SGS276 without executing the process of.

In 151SGS276, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the 7th count switch 151SG023G is turned on, that is, whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the general winning opening 151SG010 and has been detected by the 7th count switch 151SG023G. When the 7th count switch 151SG023G is turned ON (151SGS276; Y), the value of the prize ball counter is increased by +3 and the value of the out number counter is increased by +1 to proceed to 151SGS279 (151SGS277, 151SGS278), and the 7th count switch. When 151SG023G is OFF (151SGS276; N), the process proceeds to 151SGS279 without executing the processes of 151SGS277 and 151SGS278.

In 151SGS279, the CPU 103 determines whether or not any of the first out switch 151SG041A, the third out switch 151SG041C, the fifth count switch 151SG023E, and the sixth count switch 151SG023F is turned on, that is, whether or not the game ball is the first out switch 151SG041A. , The third out switch 151SG041C, the fifth count switch 151SG023E, and the sixth count switch 151SG023F are passed through, and it is determined whether or not the game board 2 is guided to the back side and discharged. When any of the first out switch 151SG041A, the third out switch 151SG041C, the fifth count switch 151SG023E, and the sixth count switch 151SG023F is turned ON (151SGS279; Y), the value of the out number counter is incremented by +1 to 151SGS281. When all of the forward (151SGS280), the first out switch 151SG041A, the third out switch 151SG041C, the fifth count switch 151SG023E, and the sixth count switch 151SG023F are OFF (151SGS279; N), the processing of 151SGS280 is not executed. Proceed to 151SGS281.

In 151SGS281, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second out switch 151SG041B is turned on, that is, whether or not the game ball has passed through the second out switch 151SG041B and is guided to the back side of the game board 2 and discharged. .. When the second out switch 151SG041B is turned ON (151SGS281; Y), whether or not the value of the remaining number counter is 1 or more, that is, the first start winning opening B or the second starting winning opening winning game. It is determined whether or not there is a game ball that is still flowing down the out flow path 151SG714 among the balls (151SGS282).

When the value of the residual number counter is 1 or more (151SGS282; Y), the value of the residual number counter is decremented by -1 and the value of the out number counter is incremented by +1 to proceed to 151SGS291 (151SGS283, 151SGS284). That is, in the feature unit 151SG, when a game ball wins in the first start winning opening B or the second starting winning opening, the value of the out number counter is not changed at the winning timing, and the winning game ball is used. The value of the out number counter is incremented by 1 based on passing through the second out shoe.

On the other hand, when the value of the residual number counter is 0 (151SGS282; N), the value of the out number counter is incremented by +1 without executing the processing of 151SGS283, and the process proceeds to 151SGS291 (151SGS284). When the second out switch 151SG041B is OFF (151SGS281; N) in 151SGS281, the process proceeds to 151SGS291 without executing the processing of 151SGS282-151SGS284.

Further, when it is determined in 151SGS262 that the gaming state is the small hit gaming state (151SGS262; Y), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the low base small hit flag is set (151SGS286). When the low base small hit flag is not set (151SGS286; N), the base value calculation process is completed, and when the low base small hit flag is set (151SGS286; Y), the first count switch is further set. It is determined whether or not 151SG023A is turned ON (151SGS287).

When the first count switch 151SG023A is OFF (151SGS287; N), the process proceeds to 151SGS291, and when the first count switch 151SG023A is ON (151SGS287; Y), whether or not the V winning flag is further set. That is, it is determined whether or not the timing when the first count switch 151SG023A is turned on is after the V winning (151SGS288). When the V winning flag is set, that is, when the timing when the first count switch 151SG023A is turned on is after the V winning (151SGS288; Y), the process proceeds to 151SGS291, and the V winning flag is not set. That is, when the timing when the first count switch 151SG023A is turned on is before the V prize (V prize has not yet occurred) (151SGS288; N), the value of the prize ball counter is increased by +15. The value of the out number counter is incremented by +1 to proceed to 151SGS291 (151SGS289, 151SGS290).

Then, in 151SGS291, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the out number counter is 6000 or more. When the value of the out number counter is 5999 or less (151SGS291; N), the base value calculation process is completed, and when the value of the out number counter is 6000 or more (151SGS291; Y), the value of the out number counter and the prize The base value in the low base state is calculated from the value of the ball counter (151SGS292). Then, the calculated base value in the low base state is updated and displayed on the display monitor 151SG029 (151SGS293), and the values of the out number counter and the prize ball number counter are reset to 0 to end the base value calculation process (151SGS294). ).

As described above, the feature unit 151SG calculates the base value for each 6000 balls when the game state is the low base state, and updates and displays the calculated base value on the display monitor 151SG029. ..

In particular, as shown in FIGS. 9-27 and 9-28 (A), when a small hit is won in the variable display of the first special symbol in the low base state (when the variable display result is a small hit), From the start of the small hit game until the V prize is generated (until the game ball is detected by the second count switch 151SG023B), the game ball is placed in the first start winning opening B, the second starting winning opening, and the large winning opening. The prize balls based on the winning of the prize are included in the number of prize balls for calculating the base value (included in the target to be added to the prize ball number counter), while the first start winning opening B and after the V prize is generated Prize balls based on the winning of game balls in the 2nd start winning slot and the large winning slot are not included in the number of prize balls for calculating the base value (not included in the target to be added to the prize ball number counter). It has become.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-27 and 9-28 (B), when the small hit is won in the variable display in the high base state after the big hit game of the big hit B to the big hit F is completed (the variable display result is small). (If you win) is a prize based on the game ball winning in the 1st start winning opening B, the 2nd starting winning opening, and the large winning opening regardless of whether or not a V prize has occurred during the small hit game. The balls are not included in the number of prize balls for calculating the base value (not included in the target to be added to the prize ball counter).

Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-27 and 9-28 (C), the gaming state is changed from the high base state to the low base state based on the satisfaction of the end condition of the high base state (see FIG. 9-19 (B)). When the state is changed (shifted), a maximum of four reserved memories of the second special symbol may be stored during the high base state. Therefore, even when the game state is the low base state, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed up to four times, but the small hit is won in the variable display of the second special symbol up to four times. In the case (when the variable display result is a small hit), the first start prize is won from the start of the small hit game until the V prize is generated (until the game ball is detected by the second count switch 151SG023B). The prize balls based on the winning of the game ball in the mouth B, the second starting prize opening, and the large winning opening are included in the number of prize balls for calculating the base value (included in the target to be added to the prize ball number counter). So, the prize balls based on the game balls winning in the 1st start winning opening B, the 2nd starting winning opening, and the big winning opening after the V prize is generated are not included in the number of prize balls for calculating the base value. (Not included in the target to be added to the prize ball count counter).

As shown in FIG. 9-28 (C), immediately after the gaming state shifts from the high base state to the low base state, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed up to four times, but the image display is performed. To display a background image for the low base state on the device 5, or to stop launching the game ball from the speakers 8L and 8R toward the right game area 151SG002R and launch the game ball toward the left game area 151SG002L. By instructing the player to switch, the player may be notified that the gaming state has changed to the low base state.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 151SG, as shown in FIG. 9-28 (A), when the variable display result is a small hit in the variable display of the first special symbol in the low base state. Is given by adding the number of prize balls given during the small hit game based on the variable display to the prize ball counter, so that the game ball wins a prize in the large winning opening that has changed to the open state in the low base state. By adding the number of prize balls to the prize ball counter, the base value in the low base state can be calculated on the display monitor 151SG029.

Further, in the winning unit 151SG700, a second count switch 151SG023B capable of detecting a game ball that has won a prize in the large winning opening is provided, and the game ball is detected by the second count switch 151SG023B during the small hit game ( Since the game ball is controlled to the big hit game state by passing the second count switch 151SG023B during the small hit game, whether the game ball passes through the second count switch 151SG023B during the small hit game. Whether or not the player can be noticed, and the game entertainment can be improved.

Further, when the variable display result of the first special symbol is a small hit in the low base state, before the V winning during the small hit game based on the variable display occurs (the game ball passes through the second count switch 151SG023B). During the period (before), the number of prize balls given by the game ball winning in the large winning opening is added to the prize ball counter, while the V prize during the small hit game based on the variable display occurs. In the period after this, the number of prize balls given by the game ball winning in the large winning opening is not added to the prize ball counter, so that the game ball counts second during the small hit game. After passing through the switch 151SG023B, that is, during the big hit game, the number of prize balls given by the game ball winning the big prize opening is added to the prize ball counter, which is inappropriate as the base value in the low base state. It is possible to prevent the value from being displayed on the display monitor 151SG029.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature unit 151SG, the left gaming area 151SG002L and the right gaming area 151SG002R are provided, and in the low base state, the gaming ball is mainly launched toward the left gaming area 151SG002L. While it is possible to play a game, in a high base state, it is possible to play a game mainly by firing a game ball toward the right game area 151SG002R, and FIGS. 9-1 and 9- As shown in 5, the special variable winning ball device 151SG701 having a large winning opening is provided in the right gaming area 151SG002R. Therefore, when the variable display result of the first special symbol is a small hit, the number of prize balls given by the game ball winning the large prize opening during the small hit game based on the variable display is taken into consideration. The base value in the low base state can be displayed on the display monitor 151SG029.

In addition, in this feature part 151SG, by providing a large winning opening in the right game area 151SG002R, a game ball flowing down the left game area 151SG002L is exemplified in a form in which a large winning opening cannot be won. The game ball is not limited, and for example, by providing a large winning opening between the winning ball device 6A and the first out opening, a game ball flowing down the right game area 151SG002R and a game ball flowing down the left game area 151SG002L Both may be able to win the big prize opening.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-28 (C), the CPU 103 has a small variable display result in a maximum of four variable displays of the second special symbol immediately after the gaming state shifts from the high base state to the low base state. Since the small hit game state is controlled by hitting, the game ball is awarded by winning a prize in the large winning opening that is opened by the variable display result of the second special symbol in the low base state becoming a small hit. The base value in the low base state in consideration of the number of prize balls given can be displayed on the display monitor 151SG029.

Further, in the base value calculation process shown in FIGS. 9-27, as shown in the processes of 151SGS264 to 151SGS266, when the first start port A switch 151SG022A is turned ON (the first start port A switch 151SG022A is a game ball). (When) is added, both the value of the out number counter and the value of the prize ball counter are added, but as shown in the processing of 151SGS271 to 151SGS273a, when the second start port switch 151SG022C is turned ON (the first). 2 When the start port switch 151SG022C detects a game ball), only the value of the prize ball counter is added without adding the value of the out number counter, so that the base value in the low base state calculated by the CPU 103 is It is possible to prevent inaccuracies.

Further, in the base value calculation process shown in FIG. 9-27, the CPU 103 switches the game ball to the second out switch 151SG041B after the game ball is detected by the second start port switch 151SG022C as shown in 151SGS281 to 151SGS284. Since the value of the out number counter is added by the detection, the value of the out number counter can be accurately added at the timing when the game ball is ejected from the game board 2, and the game ball is the second out switch 151SG041B. It is possible to prevent the addition process of the out number counter from being complicated due to the detection in.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-1 and 9-5, the first out port is provided so that a game ball flowing down the left game area 151SG002L and a game ball flowing down the right game area 151SG002R can enter. , The second out port is provided so that a game ball flowing down the right game area 151SG002R can enter and a game ball flowing down the left game area 151SG002L cannot enter, so that a game ball flowing down the left game area 151SG002L The game ball flowing down the right game area 151SG002R can be accurately discharged from the game board 2, and an accurate ratio can be calculated for the game ball flowing down the right game area 151SG002R.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-5, the winning unit 151SG700 is integrally provided with the second starting winning opening and the second starting opening switch 151SG022C, the second out opening and the second out switch 151SG041B in the right game area 151SG002R. Is provided, so that the out flow path 151SG714 for enabling the game medium that has entered the second winning opening and the second out opening to be detected by the second out switch 151SG041B is accurately provided in the winning unit 151SG700. Can be done.

Further, in the base value calculation process in FIGS. 9-27, the CPU 103 adds 0 to the value of the out number counter when the game ball is detected by the second start port switch 151SG022C, as shown in 151SGS 271 to 151 SGS273a. Is executed, the process can be shared with that when the game ball is detected by the first start port switch A151SG022A, so that the program of the base value calculation process can be simplified. In particular, in the present feature unit 151SG, since the process of adding 1 to the value of the out number counter is executed at the timing when the game ball is detected by the second out switch 151SG041B, the game ball is set to the second start port switch 151SG022C. By executing the process of adding 0 to the value of the out number counter at the detected timing, it is possible to prevent double addition of 1 to the out number counter.

In the feature unit 151SG, in the base value calculation process, 0 is added to the value of the out number counter when the game ball is detected by the second start port switch 151SG022C. Is not limited to this, and when the game ball is detected by the second start port switch 151SG022C, the process of adding 0 to the value of the out number counter described above is not executed (value of the out number counter). No numerical value is added to).

Although the feature portion 151SG of the present embodiment has been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these feature portions, and the present invention may be changed or added without departing from the gist of the present invention. Included in the invention.

For example, in the feature unit 151SG, it is possible to control the big hit game state based on the variable display result being a big hit, and it is possible to control the big hit game state based on the V prize generated during the small hit game. Although the embodiment in which the present invention is applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 (so-called type 1 type 2 mixing machine) is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the frequency of small hits after the end of the big hit game is high. The present invention may be applied to a pachinko gaming machine that can be controlled to a special state (so-called small hit rush) in which the frequency of winning the large winning opening during the small hit game is improved. When the present invention is applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 equipped with the so-called small hit rush function in this way, the game ball wins the large prize opening during the small hit rush, as in the case of the feature portion 151SG. The prize balls originally given are not included in the number of prize balls for calculating the base value (the number of prize balls given by winning the big prize opening is not added to the prize ball counter). Therefore, it is sufficient to prevent an inappropriate base value from being displayed on the display monitor 151SG029.

Further, in the feature unit 151SG, as shown in FIG. 9-5, the game ball winning the general electric winning opening passes through the fourth count switch 151SG023D and then passes through the fifth count switch 151SG023E or the sixth count switch 151SG023F. Although the embodiment is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the number of game balls that have passed through the fourth count switch 151SG023D and the number of game balls that have passed through the fifth count switch 151SG023E and the sixth count switch 151SG023F are counted. By doing so, it may be possible to detect fraudulent acts such as the same game ball repeatedly passing through the fifth count switch 151SG023E and the sixth count switch 151SG023F to open the first start winning opening B and the second starting winning opening.

Further, in the feature unit 151SG, a mode in which a base value in a low base state is displayed on the display monitor 151SG029 is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display monitor is not limited to this, and if it is information on the base value The information displayed on the 151SG029 may be information other than the base value in the low base state (for example, whether or not the calculated base value is higher than a predetermined reference value, etc.).

Further, in the feature unit 151SG, a mode in which the CPU 103 calculates a base value in a low base state by executing a base value calculation process (see FIG. 9-20) is illustrated, but the present invention is limited to this. However, the program related to the calculation of the base value may be stored in an area different from the area in which the program related to the progress of the game in the ROM 101 is stored. Further, as the data used for the program not related to the progress of the game (numerical data used for calculating the base value, the calculated numerical data, etc.), the data related to the progress of the game in the RAM 102 is stored. It may be stored in an area different from the existing area.

Further, the feature unit 151SG exemplifies a mode in which a base value in a low base state is calculated every time the number of out balls reaches 6000 balls and is updated and displayed on the display monitor 151SG029, but the present invention is limited thereto. Instead, the base values in the first high base state and the second high base state may be calculated and updated and displayed on the display monitor 151SG029, or the base values calculated in the past may be stored and stored. The average value of the base values may be displayed on the display monitor 151SG029.

1 Pachinko game machine 4A 1st special symbol display device 4B 2nd special symbol display device 5 Image display device 103 CPU
120 Production control CPU

Claims (1)

By launching the game medium into the game area and playing the game, it is possible to control the advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and it is possible to set one of a plurality of setting values that have different advantages for the player. It ’s a game machine,
A predetermined effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect according to any one of a plurality of types of effect modes is provided.
The effect mode of the predetermined effect includes a special mode that suggests that the predetermined effect is controlled, and a specific mode that suggests the setting.
The special aspect includes a first special aspect and a second special aspect suggesting that the rate of control to the advantageous state is higher than that of the first special aspect.
The specific aspect includes a first specific aspect and a second specific aspect that suggests setting of a set value having a higher advantage than the first specific aspect.
The predetermined effect executing means is
When both the predetermined effect of the second special aspect and the predetermined effect of the specific aspect can be executed, the predetermined effect of the second special aspect is executed with priority over the predetermined effect of the specific aspect.
When both the predetermined effect of the first special aspect and the predetermined effect of the specific aspect can be executed, the predetermined effect of the specific aspect can be executed with priority over the predetermined effect of the first special aspect. ,
further,
A winning means that includes at least a variable winning means that can be changed into a first state and a second state in which the game medium is more difficult to win than the first state, and the game medium is given according to the winning of the game medium.
A game state control means capable of controlling a first game state and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state.
In the first game state, a calculation means capable of calculating the ratio of the second number, which is the number of given game media, to the first number, which is the number of game media fired into the game area.
A display means for displaying information about the ratio calculated by the calculation means, and a display means.
With
When the variable winning means is controlled to a predetermined state which is a state different from the advantageous state, the variable winning means is controlled to the first state.
When the game medium wins the variable winning means that has changed to the first state based on being controlled to the predetermined state in the first gaming state, the calculation means of the gaming medium given by the winning. A gaming machine characterized by adding a number to a second number.